Sinumerik 840D SL

Introduction 1
Setting up the machine 2
Machining the 3
workpiece
SINUMERIK 840D sl Creating a ShopTurn 4

program
ShopTurn ShopTurn functions 5
Working with manual 6

Operation/Programming machine
G-code program 7
Working with a B axis 8
Working with two tool 9

holders
Valid for Tool management 10

Control
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl
Software Version Program management 11
NCU System Software for
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl 1.5
with ShopTurn 7.5
Messages, alarms, 12
user data
Examples 13
Appendix A
01/2008 Edition
Index B
SINUMERIK® Documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each version is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" column.
Status code in the "Remarks" column:
A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised reprint with new order number.
C .... Revised edition with new status.
Edition Order No. Comment

03/2001 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0 A
01/2002 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP1 C
06/2003 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP2 C
08/2005 6FC5 398-5AP10-0BA0 C
11/2006 6FC5 398-5AP10-1BA0 C
01/2008 6FC5 398-5AP10-2BA0 C
Registered trademarks
SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET®, SIROTEC®, SINUMERIK® and SIMODRIVE® are
registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining designations found in this publication could be
trademarks whose use by a third party for its own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Additional information is available on the Internet at: Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware
and software described. Nevertheless, differences might exist and therefore we
cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in
this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be
included in the next edition. Suggestions for improvement are welcome.
Technical data subject to change.

© Siemens AG 2008
6FC5398-5AP10 - 2BA0
Siemens AG
0 0
01/2008 Preface
Preface
SINUMERIK® The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:

Documentation • General documentation
• User documentation
• Manufacturer/service documentation
An overview of publications, which is updated on a monthly basis and

provides information about the language versions available, can be
found on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select the menu items "Support" Æ "Technical Documentation" Æ
"Publications Overview.”
The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at:

http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb
Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked

Questions) can be found at the following website:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu item "Support"
Target group This documentation is geared toward the operator of single-slide

lathes with SINUMERIK 840D sl.
Benefits This document familiarizes you with the operating elements and
commands. Based on the manual, you are capable of responding to
problems and to take corrective action.
Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard
version of ShopTurn. Extensions or changes made by the machine
manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be

executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding
the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied
or in the event of servicing.
Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain
all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover
every conceivable case of installation, operation or maintenance.
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 iii
0 0
Preface 01/2008
Technical Support If you have any technical questions, please contact our hotline:
Europe/Africa
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
America
Phone: +1 (0) 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 (0) 423 262 2200
E-mail: mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com
Asia/Pacific
Phone: +86 (0) 1064 719 990
Fax: +86 (0) 1064 747 474
E-mail: mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com
Technology hotline
Phone: +49 (0) 2166 5506-115
The hotline is available on weekdays between 8:00 and 17:00
National telephone numbers for technical support are provided under

the following Internet address:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Questions on the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this
documentation, please fax or e-mail us:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98-63315
E-mail: mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com
For the fax form, see the response sheet at the end of the document.
SINUMERIK Internet http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

address

iv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
0 0
01/2008 Preface
Safety information This manual contains information that must be observed to ensure
your personal safety and to prevent property damage. The notices
referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a
safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage only, have
no safety alert symbol. Depending on the hazard level, warnings are
indicated in a descending order as follows:
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that slight personal injury may result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an undesirable result or condition can occur if the
corresponding information is not observed.
In the event of a number of levels of danger prevailing simultaneously,

the warning corresponding to the highest level of danger is always
used. If a warning notice is used with the safety alert symbol to warn
against injury, this same notice may also include a warning regarding
property damage.
Qualified personnel The associated device/system must only be set up and operated
using this documentation. A device/system must only be
commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose
of the safety information in this documentation, a "qualified person" is
someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment,
systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety
procedures.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 v
0 0
Preface 01/2008
Correct usage Please note the following:
Warning
The equipment may only be used for single purpose applications
explicitly described in the catalog and in the technical description and
it may only be used along with third-party devices and components
approved by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product
required proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly, as well
as careful operation and maintenance.
Structure of the The following information blocks, marked by pictograms, are used in
documentation this documentation:
Orientation
Background information
Operating sequence
Explanation of the parameters
Additional notes
Software option
The function described is a software option, i.e. the function can be
executed on the control only if you have purchased and enabled the
appropriate option.
Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or

functions might have been changed or supplemented by the machine
manufacturer:
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is

indicated as follows:
References:
Terminology The meanings of some basic terms are given below in this
documentation.
Program
A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to
produce a specific workpiece on the machine.

vi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
0 0
01/2008 Preface
Contour
The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece.
More specifically, it refers to the section of the program that defines
the outline of a workpiece comprising individual elements.
Cycle
A cycle, such as the tapping cycle, is a subroutine specified by
ShopTurn for carrying out a recurring machining process.
(A cycle is sometimes also referred to as a function.)
Spindles/axes
The various spindles/axes are designated in this documentation as
follows:
S1: Main spindle
S2: Tool spindle
S3: Counter spindle
C1: C-axis main spindle
C3: C-axis counter spindle
Z3: Special axis (e.g. axis to move the counter spindle)
Other designations may have been assigned by the machine

manufacturer.
Unit of measurement Metric units are used for all parameters in this document. The
equivalent imperial units are shown in the table below.
Metric Inch
mm in
mm/tooth in/tooth
mm/min in/min
mm/rev in/rev
m/min ft/min

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 vii
0 0
Preface 01/2008
Notes

viii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
0 0
01/2008 Contents
Contents
Introduction 1-17
1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.1.1 Work sequence ......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20

1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22
1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-25
1.2.5 Machine control panel elements ............................................................................... 1-25
1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29

1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys............................................................................... 1-32
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36
1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-40
1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface ............................................................................................ 1-42
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-44
Setting up the machine 2-45

2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-46
2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46

2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated .................................................................... 2-48
2.3 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50

2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)................................ 2-50
2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ............................................... 2-51
2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54

2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-56
2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-57
2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually ........................................................................................ 2-63
2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe................................................................................... 2-65
2.5.5 Calibrating the probe................................................................................................. 2-67
2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass ................................................................. 2-69
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero.................................................................................. 2-70
2.7 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71

2.7.1 Setting the zero offset ............................................................................................... 2-72
2.7.2 Defining zero offsets ................................................................................................. 2-74
2.7.3 Zero offset list ........................................................................................................... 2-75
2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle ...................................................................................... 2-77

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 ix
0 0
Contents 01/2008
2.8.2 Traversing axes.........................................................................................................2-79

2.8.3 Positioning axes ........................................................................................................2-81
2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece...........................................................................2-81
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode .........................................................................................2-84
2.9 MDA ..........................................................................................................................2-86
2.10 Run times ..................................................................................................................2-87
Machining the workpiece 3-89

3.1 Starting/stopping machining......................................................................................3-90
3.2 Running in a program................................................................................................3-93
3.3 Displaying the current program block .......................................................................3-94
3.4 Repositioning axes....................................................................................................3-95
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point ..........................................................3-96
3.6 Controlling the program sequence..........................................................................3-101
3.7 Overstoring..............................................................................................................3-103
3.8 Testing a program ...................................................................................................3-104
3.9 Correcting a program ..............................................................................................3-105
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions .......................................................................3-106
3.11 Simulating machining ..............................................................................................3-107

3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece ..........................................................3-109
3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece .....................................3-110
3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining ............................................3-111
3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program......................................................3-112
3.11.5 Different workpiece views .......................................................................................3-113
3.11.6 Changing the cutout ................................................................................................3-117
3.12 Settings for automatic mode ...................................................................................3-119

3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate.....................................................................................3-119
3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter....................................................................3-120
Creating a ShopTurn program 4-121

4.1 Program structure ...................................................................................................4-122
4.2 Fundamentals..........................................................................................................4-124
4.2.1 Machining planes ....................................................................................................4-124
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction ...............................................................4-126
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions ....................................................................4-128
4.2.4 Polar coordinates ....................................................................................................4-130
4.2.5 Pocket calculator .....................................................................................................4-131
4.2.6 Adjustments.............................................................................................................4-133
4.3 Sequence program..................................................................................................4-134

4.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................4-134
4.3.2 Creating a new program..........................................................................................4-136

x SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
0 0
01/2008 Contents
4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-140

4.3.4 Changing program blocks....................................................................................... 4-144
4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-145
4.3.6 Specifying a quantity............................................................................................... 4-148
ShopTurn functions 5-149

5.1 Straight or circular path movements ....................................................................... 5-151
5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane ..................................................................... 5-152
5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-154
5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-156
5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-157
5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-159
5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-160
5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-162
5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-163

5.2.1 Centered drilling...................................................................................................... 5-164
5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-166
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-167
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-169
5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-171
5.2.6 Thread milling ......................................................................................................... 5-173
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns............................................................................ 5-175
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions .............................................................................. 5-176
5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-178
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-179
5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-182
5.2.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-184
5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-186
5.2.14 Including and skipping positions ............................................................................. 5-188
5.2.15 Repeating positions ................................................................................................ 5-189
5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-190

5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-193
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-196
5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................... 5-197
5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-199
5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-203
5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-204
5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-206

5.4.1 Representation of the contour ................................................................................ 5-208
5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-210
5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-211
5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-216
5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-218
5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material.......................................................................... 5-222
5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-224

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xi
0 0
Contents 01/2008
5.4.8 Grooving residual material ......................................................................................5-226

5.4.9 Plunge-turning .........................................................................................................5-227
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material .............................................................................5-229
5.5 Milling ......................................................................................................................5-231

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket .................................................................................................5-232
5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................5-236
5.5.3 Rectangular spigot ..................................................................................................5-240
5.5.4 Circular spigot .........................................................................................................5-244
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ......................................................................................................5-247
5.5.6 Circumferential slot .................................................................................................5-250
5.5.7 Open slot .................................................................................................................5-253
5.5.8 Positions..................................................................................................................5-259
5.5.9 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-259
5.5.10 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-261
5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................5-268

5.6.1 Representation of the contour.................................................................................5-271
5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-273
5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-275
5.6.4 Changing a contour.................................................................................................5-282
5.6.5 Path milling..............................................................................................................5-284
5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket.....................................................................................5-289
5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing).........................................................................5-293
5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket ................................................5-296
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ...................................................................................5-298
5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket ..................................................................................5-302
5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)..........................................................................5-303
5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot .................................................5-306
5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot .......................................................................................5-308
5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ...................................................................................5-311
5.7 Calling a subroutine ................................................................................................5-313
5.8 Repeating program blocks ......................................................................................5-315
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle..........................................................................5-316
5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-322
5.11 Calling zero offsets..................................................................................................5-323
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-324
5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle ...........................................................5-326
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program..........................................................5-328
5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-330
5.15.1 Teaching a cycle .....................................................................................................5-330
5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern.....................................................................................5-331
5.15.3 Teaching a contour object.......................................................................................5-332

xii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
0 0
01/2008 Contents
Working with manual machine 6-333

6.1 Manual Machine...................................................................................................... 6-334
6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-335
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode ....................................................... 6-335

6.3.1 Traversing axes ...................................................................................................... 6-336
6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-337
6.3.3 Straight turning........................................................................................................ 6-338
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode............................................ 6-339

6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine .................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine ................................................................................... 6-341
6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-342
G code program 7-343

7.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 7-344
7.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 7-347
7.3 G code editor .......................................................................................................... 7-349
7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-352
Working with a B axis 8-353

8.1 Turning machines with a B axis .............................................................................. 8-354
8.2 Tool alignment for turning ....................................................................................... 8-356
8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-356

8.3.1 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 8-357
8.3.2 Approach/retraction................................................................................................. 8-358
8.4 Position pattern ....................................................................................................... 8-360
8.5 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 8-361
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-362
Working with two tool holders 9-363

9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders ......................................................................... 9-364
9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-364
9.3 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 9-365
Tool management 10-367

10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine ............................................................. 10-368
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................. 10-374

10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-374
10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool ....................................................... 10-376
10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................. 10-377

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xiii
0 0
Contents 01/2008
10.3 Sorting tools ..........................................................................................................10-378
10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list ..............................................................................10-378
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ...............................................10-379
10.6 Relocating a tool....................................................................................................10-381
10.7 Positioning a magazine .........................................................................................10-383
10.8 Entering tool wear data .........................................................................................10-383
10.9 Activating tool monitoring ......................................................................................10-384
10.10 Managing magazine locations ..............................................................................10-386
Program management 11-387

11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn......................................................................11-388
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)........................11-389

11.2.1 Opening a program ...............................................................................................11-391
11.2.2 Executing a program .............................................................................................11-392
11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive .........................................11-393
11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program.........................................................................11-394
11.2.5 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-395
11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program.................................................................11-396
11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-397
11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data...................................................................11-398
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)...........................................11-401

11.3.1 Opening a program ...............................................................................................11-403
11.3.2 Executing a program .............................................................................................11-404
11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program ...............................................................................11-405
11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive ........11-406
11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program.........................................................................11-408
11.3.6 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-409
11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program ....................................................11-410
11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-412
11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data...................................................................11-412
Messages, alarms, user data 12-415

12.1 Messages ..............................................................................................................12-416
12.2 Alarms ...................................................................................................................12-416
12.3 User data...............................................................................................................12-417
12.4 Version display ......................................................................................................12-419
Examples 13-421
13.1 Standard machinings ............................................................................................13-422
13.2 Contour milling ......................................................................................................13-434

xiv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
0 0
01/2008 Contents
Appendix A-443
A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-444
B Index ........................................................................................................................ I-447

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xv
0 0
Contents 01/2008

xvi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1 1
01/2008 Introduction
Introduction
1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18

1.1.1 Work sequence ......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20

1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22
1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-25
1.2.5 Machine control panel elements ............................................................................... 1-25
1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29

1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys ............................................................................... 1-32
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36
1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-40
1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface ............................................................................................ 1-42
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-44

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-17
1 1
Introduction 01/2008
1.1 ShopTurn
1.1 ShopTurn
ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for
turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine
and to program workpieces.
These are some of the features the software provides:
Setting up the machine Special measurement cycles make it easier to measure the tools and
the workpiece.
Executing a program You can display the program execution in 3-D on the screen.
This makes it easy for you to check the result of programming and to
observe the progress of workpiece machining at the machine
(software option).
To execute a sequence program, you must have reading and writing

rights.
The execution of sequence programs is a software option.
Creating a program Programming the workpiece with ShopTurn is effortless, since it is

graphically supported and doesn't require knowledge of G-code.
ShopTurn shows the program in a user-friendly work plan and
displays the individual cycles and contour elements in dynamic
graphics.
The powerful contour computer allows any contour to be input.
A stock removal cycle with residual material detection saves extra
machining processes.
Tool management ShopTurn saves your tool data. The software can also manage the
data of tools that are not in the revolver.
Program management Programs can be created simply by copying and modifying similar
programs; there is no need to start again from the beginning.
Remote diagnostics You can switch from ShopTurn to the CNC-ISO operator interface.
There, you can also activate a remote diagnostic which allows the
machine to be operated via an external computer.

1-18 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1 1
1.1 ShopTurn
1.1.1 Work sequence
Two typical working situations are considered separately in this Guide.

• You want to execute a program for the purpose of automatically
machining a workpiece.
• You want to create the program to be used for machining a
workpiece.
Executing a program Before you execute a program, you have to set up your machine. To
do this, you must perform the following actions, during which you will
be supported by ShopTurn (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine"):
• Approach the reference point of the machine
(only for incremental position measuring systems)
• Tool measuring
• Define the workpiece zero
• Enter any other work offsets
If you have completely set up the machine, you can select a program
and automatically execute it (see Sec. "Machining a Workpiece").
Creating a program If you create a new program, you can select whether you would like to
make a sequence program or a G-code program (see "Creating a
Sequential Control Program" or "G-code Program").
When creating a sequence program, ShopTurn prompts you to input
all relevant parameters. Programming progress is automatically
indicated in a dashed-line diagram. Help screens that explain the
parameters in each operation also support you with programming.
You can, of course, also insert G code commands in a sequence
program.
A G code program, however, must be created entirely out of G code
commands.

1 1
1.2 Workstation
1.2 Workstation
In addition to the lathe with CNC/positioning control, a ShopTurn
workstation also has an operator panel and machine control panel.
Operator
panel
Machine
Turning machine control panel
complete with control
Workstation configuration
Turning machine You can use ShopTurn on a single-slide lathe with three axes, of a
main spindle, of a tool spindle, and of a counter-spindle.
Control ShopTurn runs on the SINUMERIK 840D sl CNC with ShopTurn on

NCU (HMI Embedded sl) and PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced).
Operator panel Communication with ShopTurn is done via the operator panel.
Machine control panel You operate the lathe using the machine control panel.

1 1
1.2 Workstation
1.2.1 Coordinate system
When machining a workpiece on a lathe, one basically uses a right-

angled coordinate system. This consists of the three coordinate axes
X, Y, and Z which are parallel to the machine axes. The coordinate
axis Y does not have to be set up. Spindle axis Z is an independently
rotating axis and is designated with the letter C.
The positions of the coordinate system and the machine zero depend
on the type of machine used.
Y+
M X+
W
Z+
M = Machine zero
W = Workpiece zero
Position of the coordinate system, machine zero

and workpiece zero (example)

1 1
1.2 Workstation
1.2.2 Operator panels
You can use one of the following operator panels for the PCU:
OP 010
OP 010C
OP 010S
OP 012
OP 015
OP 015A
OP 015AT
TP 015A
TP15AT
In this example, the OP 010 operator panel front is used to illustrate

the components that are available for operating the control and
machine tool.
The keys are described in the next section.
Operator panel OP 010

4
1
.
3 6
2 2
Operator panel OP 010
1 Screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal softkey bar
4 Vertical softkey bar
5 Alphanumeric keypad
Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key
6 USB interface

1 1
1.2 Workstation
1.2.3 Operator panel keys
Alarm Cancel
Cancels the alarm that is marked with this symbol.
Channel
Has no meaning for ShopTurn.
Help
Toggles between the process plan and programming graphics as well
as between the parameterization screen form with programming
graphics and the parameterization screen form with the help display.
Next Window
Page Up or Page Down

Page upward or downward in the directory or in the process plan.
Cursor
Navigate between different fields or lines.
Use Cursor right to open a directory or program.
Use Cursor left to switch to the next highest level in the directory tree.
Select
Chooses one of a number of options presented.
This key has the same function as the "Alternat." softkey.
End
Moves the cursor to the last input field in a parameterization screen
form.
Backspace
• Delete the value in the input field.
• In insertion mode, it deletes the character after the cursor.
Tab
Shift
Depress the Shift key to enter the upper character shown on the dual
input keys.

1 1
1.2 Workstation
Ctrl
Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan
and in the G code editor:
• Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the beginning.
• Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.
Old
Del
• Deletes the value in the parameter field.
• In insertion mode, it deletes the character marked by the cursor.
• Deletes the machining lines during parallel drawing and in the
simulation.
Insert
Activates insertion mode or the pocket calculator.
Input
• Terminates entry of a value in the input field.
• Opens a directory or program.
Alarm - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Opens the "Messages/Alarms" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" softkey.
Program - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Opens the "Program" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Prog. edit" softkey.
Offset - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Opens the "Tools/Offsets" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Tool zero point" softkey
Program Manager - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Opens the "Program Manager" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Program" softkey.

1 1
1.2 Workstation
1.2.4 Machine control panels
The lathe can be equipped with a machine control panel by Siemens

or with a specific machine control panel from the machine
manufacturer.
You perform actions on the lathe via the machine control panel, for
example, traversing axes or starting the machining of the workpiece.
When functions are active, the LEDs on the corresponding keys on
the machine control panel light up.
1.2.5 Machine control panel elements
EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton

Press this pushbutton in an emergency, i.e. when there is a danger to
life or there is a risk of damage to the machine or workpiece.
All drives will be stopped with the greatest possible braking torque.
For additional responses to pressing the Emergency Stop button,

please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Reset
Reset • Interrupts execution of the current program.
The CNC control remains synchronized with the machine.
It is in its initial state and ready for a new program run.
• Cancels an alarm
Jog
Jog Select Machine Manual operating mode.
Teach In
Teach In Has no meaning for ShopTurn.
MDA
MDA Selects MDA mode.
Auto
Auto Selects Machine Auto operating mode.

1 1
1.2 Workstation
Single Block
Single Block Executes the program block by block (single block).
Repos
Repos Repositions, re-approaches the contour.
Ref. Point
Ref Point Approach reference point.
Inc Var (incremental feed variable)

VAR Incremental mode with variable increment size.
Inc (Incremental feed)

1 10000 Incremental mode with predefined increment size of
...
1, ..., 10,000 increments.
A machine data code defines how the increment value is interpreted.

Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Cycle Start
Cycle Start Starts execution of a program.
Cycle Stop
Cycle Stop Stops execution of a program.
Axis keys
+X ...
Z Traverse axis in corresponding direction.
Rapid
Rapid Traverses axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed).
WCS MCS
WCS MCS Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work)
and machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

1 1
1.2 Workstation
Feedrate/Rapid Traverse Override

Raises or lowers the programmed feedrate or rapid traverse.
The programmed feedrate or rapid traverse is set to 100% and can be
%
adjusted between 0% and 120% (only up to 100% for rapid traverse).
The new feedrate setting appears in the feedrate status display on the
screen as an absolute value and as a percentage.
Feed Stop
Feed Stop Stops execution of the running program and shuts down axis drives.
Feed Start
Feed Start Continues execution of the program in the current block and ramps up
to the feedrate specified in the program.
Spindle override
Increases or decreases the programmed spindle speed.
% The programmed spindle speed is set to 100% and can be controlled
from 50 to 120%. The new spindle speed setting appears in the
spindle status display on the screen as an absolute value in percent.
Spindle Dec. – only OP032S machine control panel

Spindle Dec. Decreases the programmed spindle speed.
Spindle Inc. – only OP032S machine control panel
Spindle Inc. Increases the programmed spindle speed.
100% – only OP032S machine control panel
100% Restores the programmed spindle speed.
Spindle Stop
Spindle Stop Stop spindle.
Spindle Start
Spindle Start Start spindle.

1 1
1.2 Workstation
Key-operated switch
You can use the keyswitch to set various access rights. The keyswitch
has four settings for protection levels 4 to 7.
Machine data can be programmed to interlock access to programs,
data, and functions at various protection levels.
The keyswitch has three keys of different colors that you can remove
in the specified positions:
Position 0 Lowest
No key access rights
Level of protection 7 ⏐
⏐
⏐
⏐
Position 1 ⏐
⏐
⏐
Key 1 black ⏐
↓
Level of protection 6 Increasing
access authorization
Position 2 ⏐
Key 1 green ⏐
⏐
⏐
Level of protection 5 ⏐
⏐
⏐
⏐
↓
Position 3
Highest
Key 1 red access rights
Level of protection 4
When you change the key position to change the access

authorization, this is immediately not visible on the operator interface.
You have to initiate an action first (e.g. close or open a directory).
If the PLC is in the Stop state (LED of the machine control panel is
flashing), ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch positions during
boot up.
The machine manufacturer can set up protection levels 0 to 3 using a

password. When the password is set, ShopTurn does not evaluate the
keyswitch position.

1 1
1.3 User interface
1.3 User interface
1.3.1 Overview
Screen layout
User interface
1 Active operating mode/operating area and secondary mode

2 Alarm and message line
3 Program name
4 Program path
5 Channel state and program control
6 Channel operational messages
7 Position display of the axes
8 Display for
• active tool T
• current feedrate F
• active spindle (S1 = main spindle, S2 = tool spindle,
S3 = counter spindle)
• spindle utilization in percent
9 Display of active work offsets and rotation
10 Working window
11 Dialog line for additional explanatory text
12 Horizontal softkey bar
13 Vertical softkey bar
14 Softkeys
15 Screen buttons

1 1
1.3 User interface
Secondary mode REF: Approaching a reference point

REPOS: Repositioning
INC1 ... INC10000: Fixed increment
INC_VAR: Variable increment
Channel status RESET

Active
Interrupted
Program control SKP: Skip G code block

DRY: DRY run feedrate
!ROV: Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse override)
SBL1: Single-block (stop after each block that has a function on the
machine)
SBL2: Selection not possible in ShopTurn (stop after each block)
SBL3: Single-block fine (stop after each block, also within a cycle)
M01: Programmed stop
DRF: DRF offset
PRT: Program test
Channel operational Stop: An operator action is required.

messages
Wait: No operator action is required.
If a dwell time is active, the remaining dwell time is displayed. It is either

displayed in seconds or as spindle revolutions.
Position display of the The actual value display in the position display refers to the SZS
axes coordinate system (settable zero system). The position of the active tool
relative to the workpiece zero is displayed.
Symbols for axis displays:

Linear axis clamped
Rotary axis clamped
Feedrate status Feed is not enabled
Spindle status Spindle not enabled

Spindle is stationary
Spindle is turning clockwise
Spindle is turning counter-clockwise
The display of the spindle utilization as a percentage can be 200%.


1 1
1.3 User interface
Key to the meaning of the symbol colors:

Red: Machine is stationary
Green: Machine is running
Yellow: Waiting for operator to take action
Gray: Miscellaneous
Screen buttons
Machine
Call active operating mode (Machine Manual, MDA, or Machine Auto).
Return jump
Extension
Changes the horizontal softkey bar.
Menu Select
Calls the main menu:
The machine manufacturer can display defined symbols instead of the

program path (4). The program path is then displayed together with
the program name (3).

1 1
1.3 User interface
1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys
The ShopTurn operator interface consists of various screen forms in

which there are eight horizontal and eight vertical softkeys
respectively. You operate the softkeys with the keys next to the
softkey bars.
Each softkey displays a new screen form.
ShopTurn has 3 modes (Manual Machine, MDA, and Machine Auto)

and 4 operating areas (Program Manager, Program Messages/
Alarms, and Tools/Zero-point offsets).
To switch from one operating mode/operating area to another, press

the "Menu Select" key. The main menu is displayed, in which you can
select the appropriate operating area via a softkey.
Alternatively, you can call the operating areas via the hardkeys on the
operator panel.
You can activate an operating mode directly at any time via the keys
Jog MDA Auto on the machine control panel.
If you select the "Machine" softkey in the main menu, the screen form
for the currently active mode appears.

1 1
1.3 User interface
If you select another operating mode or operating area, the horizontal

and vertical softkey bars change.
Main menu
Machine Manual operating mode

1 1
1.3 User interface
If you press a horizontal softkey within an operating mode or operating

area, only the vertical softkey bar will change.
Machine Manual operating mode
Function within Machine Manual operating mode

1 1
1.3 User interface
When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line on the
operator interface, you can change the horizontal softkey bar within an
operating area. This is done by pressing the "Expansion" key.
Pressing the "ETC" key again will take you back to the original
horizontal softkey bar.
Within an operating mode or operating area, you can use the "Back"
softkey to return to the next highest screen form.
Use the "Abort" softkey to exit a screen form without accepting the
entered values and return to the next highest screen form.
When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the

parameterization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form
and save the parameters using the "Accept" softkey.
Use the "OK" softkey to initiate an action immediately, e.g. to rename

or delete a program.
Some softkeys are displayed with a black background when you

On activate the function assigned to them.
Program In that case, you can deactivate the function by pressing the softkey
test Off again. The softkey will then have a gray background again.

1 1
1.3 User interface
1.3.3 Program views
You can display a work step program in various views.
Program manager In the program manager, you manage all your programs. You can also
select a program here for machining the workpiece.
Program manager
Select the program manager with the "Program" softkey or "Program

-or- Manager" key.
You can move around within a directory using the "Cursor up" and
"Cursor down" keys.
Use the "Cursor right" key to open a directory.
Use the "Cursor left" key to move up to the next-higher directory level.
Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the process plan for a
-or- program.

1 1
1.3 User interface
Process plan The process plan provides an overview of the separate machining
steps of a program.
Process plan
You can move between the program blocks in the process plan using
the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.
Use the "Help" key to switch between the process plan and the
programming graphics.
Programming graphics The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece as a
dynamic graphic with dashed lines. The program block selected in the
process plan is color-highlighted in the programming graphics.
Programming graphics

1 1
1.3 User interface
Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the process
plan. The appropriate parameterization mask complete with
programming graphics is then displayed.
Parameter screen with The programming graphics in a parameterization screen form show
programming graphics the contour of the current machining step in broken-line graphics
complete with the parameters.
Parameter screen with programming graphics
Use the cursor keys to move between the input fields within a
parameterization screen form.
Use the "Help" key to switch between the programming graphics and
the help display.

1 1
1.3 User interface
Parameter screen with The help display in the parameterization screen form explains the
help display parameters of the machining step individually.
Parameter screen with help display
The colored symbols in the help displays have the following meaning:
Yellow circle = reference point
Red arrow = tool traveling at rapid traverse
Green arrow = tool traveling at machining feedrate

1 1
1.3 User interface
1.3.4 Entering parameters
On setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter

values in the white fields for various parameters.
Parameters, whose input fields have a gray background, are
automatically calculated by ShopTurn.
White field Gray field

input input
Parameter
Unit
Parameterization screen form
Selecting parameters Some parameters require you to select from a number of options in
the input field. Fields of this type do not allow you to type in a value.
Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required
-or- setting is displayed.
The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when the cursor is positioned on

an input field that presents a choice of options. The "Select" key is
also only active in this situation.
Entering parameters For the remaining parameters, enter a numerical value in the input
field using the keys on the operator panel.
Enter the desired value.
Press the "Input" key to terminate entry.
If you do not want to enter a value, i.e. not even "0", press the
-or- "Backspace" or "Del" key.

1 1
1.3 User interface
Selecting the unit For certain parameters, you can choose between different units.
Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required
-or- unit is displayed.
The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when you have a choice of units
for this parameter. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.
Deleting parameters If an input field contains an invalid value, you can delete it completely.
Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.

-or-
Changing or calculating If you only want to change individual characters in an input field rather
parameters than overwriting the entire entry, switch to insertion mode. In this
mode, the pocket calculator is also active. You can use it during
programming to calculate parameter values.
Press the "Insert" key.
Insertion mode and the pocket calculator are activated.
You can navigate within the input field using the "Left cursor" and
"Right cursor" keys.
Use the "Backspace" or "Del" key to delete individual characters.
For more information on the pocket calculator, see Section "Pocket

calculator".
Accepting parameters When you have correctly entered all the necessary parameters in the
parameterization screen form, you can close the screen form and
save the parameters.
Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key.

-or- If there are several input fields in a line and you want to use the
"Cursor left" key to accept the parameters, you must position the
cursor in the leftmost input field.
You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously

erroneous. In this case, you can see from the dialog line which
parameters are missing or were entered incorrectly.

1 1
1.3 User interface
1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface
From the ShopTurn operator interface, you can switch to the CNC
operator interface.
There, you can activate remote diagnostics. This allows the controller
to be operated via an external computer.
The machine manufacturer must have released the change from the
ShopTurn operator interface to the CNC-ISO operator interface.
You can find a detailed description of the CNC-ISO operator interface

in:
References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl
SINUMERIK 840D sl
/BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
/PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals
/PGA/, Programming Manual Advanced
The remote diagnosis is a software option.
For further information about remote diagnosis, please refer to:

References: /FB/, Description of Functions, Extension Functions,
F3 Remote diagnosis
Interface utilisateur CNC

ISO
Press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the horizontal softkey bar.
-and-
Then press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the vertical softkey bar.

1 1
1.3 User interface
CNC-ISO operator interface
¾ Press the "Menu Select" key if you want to return to the ShopTurn
operator interface.
-and-
ShopTurn ¾ Press the "ShopTurn” softkey.
Remote diagnosis
¾ Press the "Menu Select" key in the CNC-ISO operator interface.
¾ Press the "Diagnosis” softkey.

Diagnosis
Remote ¾ Press the "Remote diagnosis” softkey.

diagnosis

1 1
1.3 User interface
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3)
There is ShopTurn software for the PCU 50.3 in the ShopTurn Open
version.
In ShopTurn Open, the HMI Advanced operating areas "Services",

"Diagnosis", "Commissioning" and "Parameters" (without tool
management and zero-point offsets) are located directly on the
expanded horizontal softkey bar.
You can find a detailed description of the integrated HMI Advanced

operating areas in:
References: /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced
Some of the softkeys in the basic menu or extended menu bars may
be assigned to other operating areas by the machine manufacturer.

2 2
01/2008 Setting up the machine
Setting up the machine
2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-46
2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46

2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated .................................................................... 2-48
2.3 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50

2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches) ................................ 2-50
2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ............................................... 2-51
2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54

2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-56
2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-57
2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually ........................................................................................ 2-63
2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe................................................................................... 2-65
2.5.5 Calibrating the probe................................................................................................. 2-67
2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass ................................................................. 2-69
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................. 2-70
2.7 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71

2.7.1 Setting the zero offset ............................................................................................... 2-72
2.7.2 Defining zero offsets ................................................................................................. 2-74
2.7.3 Zero offset list............................................................................................................ 2-75
2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle ...................................................................................... 2-77
2.8.2 Traversing axes ........................................................................................................ 2-79
2.8.3 Positioning axes ........................................................................................................ 2-81
2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece .......................................................................... 2-81
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode ......................................................................................... 2-84
2.9 MDA .......................................................................................................................... 2-86
2.10 Run times .................................................................................................................. 2-87

2 2
Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.1 Switching on and off
2.1 Switching on and off
To switch the controller or machine on and off, please see the

machine manufacturer’s specifications.
After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen

appears.
Basic manual machine screen
2.2 Approaching a reference point

Your turning machine can be equipped with an absolute or
incremental path measuring system. An incremental path measuring
system must be calibrated after being switched on, but an absolute
path measuring system does not.
For the incremental path measuring system, all the machine axes
must therefore first approach a reference point, the coordinates of
which are known to be relative to the machine zero-point.
The sequence in which you must refer the axes is preset by the
machine manufacturer. The axes can also all approach the reference
point simultaneously, depending on the manufacturer’s settings.
During the reference point traversing, the feedrate override is in effect.

2 2
Notice
Before approaching the reference point, the coordinates of the actual
value display are incorrect.
In addition, the path limitations of the axes set by the machine
manufacturer are not yet in effect.
Warning
During the reference point approach, the axes travel along a direct
path to the reference point.
Therefore, first move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid
collisions when during the approach to the reference point.
It is important that you observe the movement of the axes on the
machine during the approach to the reference point.
Referencing axes
Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

Ref Point
Select the axis to be traversed.

X
Press the "-" or “+” key.
…
+
The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with
an icon.
If an axis key in the wrong direction is selected, the axis does not
move.
Interrupting axis motion
Press the "Feed Stop" key.

Feed Stop The axis stops.
Approach again with

axis
Select the axis to be moved and press the desired direction key.
X ... The axis resumes moving in the direction of the reference point.
After the all machine axes have traversed to the reference point, the
path measuring system is calibrated and the path limitations of the
axes are in effect. The correct coordinates of the reference point are
displayed in the actual value display.

2 2
2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated
If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need
to confirm that the current displayed position of an axis corresponds to
its actual position on the machine when you reference an axis. Your
confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other Safety
Integrated functions.
You can only give your user agreement for an axis after it has
approached the reference point.
The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate

system (MCS = machine).
User agreement with Safety Integrated is only possible with a software

option.
For more information on user agreement, please refer to:
References: /FBSI/, Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety
Integrated
Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

Ref Point
Select the axis to be traversed.

X …
Press the "-" or “+” key.
…
+
The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with
an icon.
User Press the "User agreement" softkey.

agreement
The "User agreement" window opens.
It shows a list of all machine axes with their current and SI positions.
Position the cursor in the "Agreement" field for the axis in

question.
Give your agreement by pressing the "Alternat." softkey or the

-or- "Select" key.
The selected axis is marked with a cross meaning "safely referenced"

in the "Agreement" column.
By pressing the "toggle keys," you again deactivate the agreement.

2 2
2.3 Modes
2.3 Modes
There are various modes in which you can work in ShopTurn:
• Machine Manual
• MDA (Manual Data Automatic)
• Machine Auto
Machine Manual In "Machine Manual“ mode, there is a provision for the following
preparatory actions in manual mode:
• Approaching the reference point, i.e. calibrating the machine’s path
measuring system
• Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode,
i.e. measuring tools, measuring the workpiece and, if necessary,
defining the work offsets used in the program
• Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption
• Positioning axes
• Simple stock removal of workpiece
You can select the "Manual Machine“ mode using the "Jog" key.
Jog The parameters set under "T, S, M..." affect all movements in manual
mode with the exception of reference point approach.
Manual machine If you have the "Manual Machine" option, you are working in "Machine
Manual" for the manual mode. Under "Machine Manual," you have the
option of carrying out the following machining processes without
having to write a program for them:
• Setting-up and simple traversing movements

• Taper turning
• Straight (plan or longitudinal turning)
• Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling,
threads)
• Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping)
• Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)
MDA In MDA mode, you can enter and execute G code commands non-
modally to set up the machine or to perform a single action.
You can select MDA mode via the "MDA" key.

MDA

2 2
2.4 Settings for the machine
Machine Auto In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only
partially. You can also trace execution of the program in a graphical
display on the screen.
You can select "Machine Auto" via the "Auto" key.

Auto
2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)
You can set millimeters or inches as the unit of measure. Switching

the unit of measure is done for the entire machine, i.e. ShopTurn
automatically converts all the specifications to the new unit of measure
such as:
• Positions
• Tool offsets
• Zero offsets
Independently of the general machine setting, you can change the unit
of measure for manual mode (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode") or
change it again for individual programs (see Sec. "Creating a New
Program"). These settings for the unit of measure are only relative to
the programmed positions. Tool offsets, zero-point offsets, etc. remain
in the unit of measure of the entire machine.
If, for example, you have set millimeters as the unit of measure for the
machine, but a workpiece drawing is scaled in inches, you can select
inches as the unit of measure for this program. This means that during
programming, you can directly specify the positions in inches. On the
other hand, tool offsets, feedrates, etc. must be set in millimeters as
usual.
Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual"

Jog mode.
Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey.
Inch Press the “Inch” softkey.

Inch
Unit of measurement: millimeters (softkey is
deselected.)
Inch
Unit of measurement: Inch (softkey is selected.)
A prompt asks you whether the unit of measure should really be

switched.
Press the "OK" softkey.
The unit of measure for the entire machine is adapted.

2 2
2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS)
The coordinates in the actual value display are relative to either the
machine coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system. The
machine coordinate system (MKS), in contrast to the workpiece
coordinate system (WKS), does not take into consideration any zero-
point offsets (see Sec. "Zero-point Offsets"). By default, the workpiece
coordinate system is set as a reference for the actual value display.
Press the "WCS MCS" key.

WCS MCS
-or-
Select the "Machine Manual" mode or "Machine Auto" mode.

Jog Auto
-or- -and-
Actual Press the "Actual value MCS" softkey in order to select or

value MCS deselect this coordinate system.
Actual
value MCS WKS (softkey is deselected.)
Actual
value MCS MKS (softkey is selected.)

2 2
2.4.3 Spindles
In the "Spindles" screen form, you store the dimensions of the

spindles on your machine.
Measuring a manual tool If you want to use the collet of the main or counter spindle as a
reference point during manual measuring, specify the collet
dimensions ZL0 or ZL1.
Counterspindle You can measure either the forward edge or stop edge of the counter-
spindle. The forward edge or stop edge automatically serves as the
valid reference point when traversing the counter-spindle. This is
especially important when gripping the workpiece with the counter-
spindle (see Sec. "Machining with the Counter-spindle").
Front edge Stop edge
Dimensioning of the counter-spindle
Please observe the machine manufacturer’s specifications for the

parameter "Tensioning."
Main spindle
Dimensioning of the main spindle

2 2
Tailstock
Dimensioning of the tailstock

The length of the tailstock (ZR) and the diameter of the tail stock (XR)
of the spindle screen are needed for the display of the tailstock in the
simulation.
¾ Select the "Tools WOs" operating area.
¾ Press the "Expansion" key.
¾ Press the "Spindles” softkey.
¾ Enter the parameters.
The settings take effect immediately.
Parameter Description Unit
S1 Speed limit for the main spindle rev/min

Tensioning Main spindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside
ZL0 Main spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm
S3 Speed limit for the counter-spindle rev/min
Tensioning Counterspindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside
Endpiece type Dimensions of the forward edge or stop edge
ZL1 Counter-spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm
ZL2 Counter-spindle stop dimensions (inc) mm
ZL3 Counter-spindle endpiece dimensions (inc) - (only for dimensioning the stop edge) mm
XR Tailstock diameter mm
ZR Tailstock length mm

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5 Tools
The various tool geometries must be taken into consideration while
the program is being executed. These are entered in the tool list as
so-called tool offset data. For each call-up of a tool, the controller
takes the tool offset data into consideration.
When programming therefore, you only have to enter the workpiece

dimensions from the finishing drawing. After this, the controller
independently calculates the individual tool path.
Tool length offset The tool length offset compensates for the length differences between
the various tools in the X and Z direction.
The tool length is the distance between the tool-carrier reference point
T and tool tip P. If the tool is tensioned in the revolver for a new
machining direction, other tool length offsets will result.
T
X
Z
Length X
P
Length X
P T
Length Z Length Z
Tool length offsets

You can determine the tool length offset using the "Measure tool"
function or manually with a probe or a magnifying glass.
The control calculates the traversing movements from the tool length
offset and wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool Wear Data").

2 2
2.5 Tools
Tool/cutting edge radius The workpiece contour and the traversing path of a tool are not
offset identical, since a tool should not move with its center-point along the
contour that is to be finished.
ShopTurn shifts the programmed tool path, depending on the radius of
the tool and on the machining direction, such that the tool's cutting
edge traverses exactly along the desired contour. This shifted tool
path is called the equidistant.
Equidistant Equidistant
Equidistants during turning and milling

The controller calculates the shifted tool path from the tool radius
entered in the tool list and the wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool
Wear Data").
You can find further information on radius offset in Sec. "Program

blocks".

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5.1 Creating a new tool
Before you can work with a new tool, you must first enter it in the tool
list. When setting-up a new tool, ShopTurn makes a variety of tool
types available to you. The tool type determines which geometry data
are required and how they will be computed.
Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning. As with a
turning tool, the direction of rotation must be specified.
Install the new tool in the revolver (see Sec. "Selecting the Tool
and Spindle").
Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool
occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the
tool list.
New > Press the "New tool" softkey.

tool
Roughing Select the desired tool type and position using the softkeys.
3D_Probe
tool ... Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge
positions are made available to you.
The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Enter a unique tool name.

You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain
a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the
underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").
Enter the offset data of the tool.
2.5.2 Tool list
In the tool list, enter all the tool parameters that are needed:
• for calculating the tool length or radius offset,

• for calculating the machining cycles,
• for displaying the tools during the simulation of the program
execution.
Depending on the tool type, various parameters are required.
Length X
Toolholder
Plate length
angle
Cutter radius Cutting direction Plate angle
Length Z
Rougher/Finisher

2 2
2.5 Tools
Diameter
Length X
Length X
Plate length
Radius Plate width

Length Z Length Z
Recessing tool Milling tool
Length X
Length X
Diameter
Tip angle
Radius
Length Z
Length Z
Drill Threading tool

2 2
2.5 Tools
Diameter
Length X
Length Z
Length X
Stop
Radius
Length Z
Button
Plate angle
Length X
88°
90°
Toolholder angle
Rotary drill
Radius
Bore Ø
Length Z
Rotary drill

2 2
2.5 Tools
Length X
Length X
Diameter
Pitch
Diameter
Length Z
Length Z
Screw tap 3D probe
Tool list
The tool list is adapted by the machine manufacturer if necessary.
Loc. Location number in the magazine
The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the

machining position, has a gray background.
If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the
magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine
(e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are
displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when
sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)
For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-
gripper can also be displayed.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Spindle location
Locations for grippers 1 and 2
Type Tool type and cutting edge position

Using the "Alternat." key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge
position.
Tool name The tool is identified by its name. You can enter the name as text or a
number (see Sec. "Setting-up a New Tool").
DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool)

(DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool,
DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)
Tool offset data

Cutting edge Tool offset data for a selected cutting edge of a tool (D No.)
Length X Tool length offset in direction X

You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see
Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying
glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value
here.
Length Z Tool length offset in direction Z

You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see
Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying
glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value
here.
Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool

For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the diameter. For
turning tools, you can only specify the cutting edge radius. A machine
data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification.
Reference direction for the holder angle
The holder angle of a cutting tool

The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
machining rear cuts.
The plate angle of a cutting tool

The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
Pitch Thread pitch of a tap drill in mm/rev or thread intervals/''

2 2
2.5 Tools
Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill
Plat.width Plate width of a pin

The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.
Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin

The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the
program execution simulation.
H The "H" column is displayed only if ISO dialects are set up.
The number of the tool offset memory that belongs to the tool is
displayed in the H column.
N The number of teeth for a milling machine

From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if
the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.
Angle of the tool tip for a drill

When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as
far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into
consideration.
Tool-specific functions
Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation
The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for
powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or
counter-spindle for turning tools.
If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial
threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting
direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the
tool.
CW spindle rotation
CCW spindle rotation
Spindle not switched on

2 2
2.5 Tools
Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) on/off
Coolant ON
Coolant OFF
The coolant supply on the machine does not necessarily have to be

set-up.
¾ Enter the desired tool name and the values for the tool offset data
in the tool list.
¾ Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key to carry out the
-or- desired settings for the tool-specific functions.
2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually
When measuring manually, manually traverse the tool to a known

reference point in order to determine the tool dimensions in the X and
Z directions. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the
position of the tool-carrier reference point and the reference point.
You can also use the workpiece edge as a reference point or, when
measuring in the Z direction, you can also use the main spindle or
counter-spindle collets.
You specify the position of the workpiece edge during the

measurement, However, you must make the position of the collet
known before the measurement (see Sec. "Spindles").
Reference Point
Workpiece Edge
¾ Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Jog
¾ Press the "Manual" softkey.

Manual >
X Z
¾ Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you
-or- want to measure.
¾ Press the "Tools" softkey.

Tools
¾ Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge
position and the radius or diameter of the tool must already be
entered in the tool list.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Back to ¾ Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

manual
The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.
¾ Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the
tool.
¾ Traverse the tool in the direction that is to be measured and

scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").
Measure length X Measure length Z
¾ Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0.

If no value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is taken from the
actual value display.
Set ¾ Press the "Set length" softkey.

length
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are
automatically taken into consideration as well.
Store If you want to save the position of the tool after scratching the tool,
position press the "Store position" softkey. Then, for example, you can
traverse the axes in order to manually measure the position of the
workpiece edge X0 more easily.
Reference Point Collet

Jog
¾ Press the "Manual" and "Z" softkeys.

Manual > Z
¾ Select the "main spindle collet" or "counter-spindle collet"

reference point.

Tools
Back to ¾ Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

manual
The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.

2 2
2.5 Tools
¾ Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the
tool.
¾ Traverse to the collet and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the

Axes").
Measure length Z

length
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are
automatically taken into consideration as well.
2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe
During automatic measuring, you determine the tool dimensions in the

directions X and Z with the aid of a probe. ShopTurn then calculates
the tool offset data from the known position of the tool-carrier
reference point and the probe.
If you want to measure your tools with a probe, a special cycle for that
purpose must be set-up by your machine manufacturer.
If there is a second probe on the counter-spindle, the machine
manufacturer must disclose this in a machine data element.
Before the actual measurement, you must enter the cutting edge
position and the radius or diameter of the tool in the tool list. You must
also calibrate the probe beforehand.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Change-in the tool that you want to measure (see Sec. "Selecting
the Tool and Spindle").
Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Press the "Autom.” softkey.

Autom. >
X Z
Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you
-or- want to measure.
Measure length X Measure length Z
Select the cutting edge number (D number) of the tool.
In the event that there are two probes on the machine, select
whether you want to use the probe on the main or counter-
spindle.
Manually position the tool in the vicinity of the probe in such a way
that any collisions can be avoided when the probe is being
traversed in the corresponding direction.
Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
The automatic measuring process is started, i.e. the tool is traversed
at the measurement feedrate to the probe and back again.
The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. During this,
the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically
taken into consideration as well.

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5.5 Calibrating the probe
If you want to automatically measure your tools, you must first

determine the position of the probe in the machine space in reference
to the machine zero-point.
The "Calibrate probe" function is only available if an adequate level of

protection is set.
You must approach the probe from 4 directions (+X, -X, +Z, -Z) for
calibration purposes.
To do this, use a calibrating tool that you can use to approach the
probe in all the required directions.
Calibrating the tool probe with a calibration tool

The type (rougher or finisher) must be set for the probe. During this,
the cutting edge must always point in the –X and –Z direction (cutting
edge position 3). You must enter the length and the radius or diameter
of the calibrating tool in the tool list.
If there is a second probe on the counter-spindle, the machine

manufacturer must disclose this in a machine data element.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Change the calibrating tool.
Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Calibrate Press the "Calibrate meas. cal.” softkey.

meas. cal.
X Z
Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which point of the
-or- probe you wish to determine first.
Calibrate probe in X Calibrate probe in Z
In the event that there are two probes on the machine, select
whether you want to use the probe on the main or counter-
spindle.
Select the direction (+ or -), in which you would like to approach

the probe.
Position the calibrating tool in the vicinity of the probe in such a

way that any collisions can be avoided when the first point of the
probe is being approached.

Cycle Start
The calibration process is started, i.e. the calibrating tool is
automatically traversed at the measurement feedrate to the probe and
back again.
The position of the probe is determined and saved in an internal data
area.
Repeat the process for the other 3 points of the probe.

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass
You can also use a magnifying glass to determine the tool

dimensions, if this is available on the machine.
During this, ShopTurn calculates the tool offset data from the known
positions of the tool-carrier reference point and the cross-hairs of the
magnifying glass.

Jog
Magnifying ¾ Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.

glass >

Tools
¾ Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

Back to
manual
¾ Traverse the tool to the magnifying glass (see Sec. "Traversing
the Axes").
¾ Bring the tool tip P into alignment with the cross-hairs of the
magnifying glass.

length
The tool lengths are calculated automatically and entered in the tool
list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter
are automatically taken into consideration as well.

2 2
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the
workpiece zero. To determine this zero, measure the length of the
workpiece and save the position of the cylinder's face surface in the
direction Z in a zero-point offset. This means that the position is stored
in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.
The prerequisite for measuring the workpiece is that a tool with known
lengths is in the machining position (see Sec. "Select Tool and
Spindle").
Select the "Meas. workp." softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Select the desired offset in which the position of the cylinder front
surface is to be saved.
-or-
Work Press the "Work offset” softkey.
offset
-and-
Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.
-and-
Back to Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
manual
Traverse the tool in the direction Z and scratch it (see Sec.
"Traversing the Axes").
Enter the desired position of the workpiece edge Z0.
Set work Press the "Set work offset” softkey.

offset
The workpiece zero-point and the accompanying zero-point offset are
calculated. The tool length is automatically included in the calculation.
Example: Workpiece edge position setpoint Z0 = 0
Tool length offset Z = 37.6 mm
⇒ Z = -37.6

2 2
2.7 Zero offsets
2.7 Zero offsets

Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the
axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine
coordinate system (MCS = machine). The program for machining the
workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the
workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work).
The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical.
The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in
accordance with the type of tool and how it is clamped. This zero
offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can
be a combination of different offsets.
For ShopTurn, the actual value display of the positions is relative to
the ENS coordinate system. The position of the active tool relative to
the workpiece zero is displayed.
The offsets are summated as follows:
W WCS
Coordinate transformation
Total
offset
Work offset fine
Work offset coarse
Basic offset MCS

M
Zero offsets
When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least
one offset (base offset or work offset) exists in which the position of
the workpiece zero is saved.
Base offset The base offset is a work offset that is always active. If you have not
defined a base offset, its value will be zero. You determine the base
offset via "Zero-point workpiece" (see Sec. "Measuring the workpiece
zero") or "Setting the zero offset" (see Sec. "Setting the zero offset").

2 2
2.7 Zero offsets
Zero offsets Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse
offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any
sequence program (coarse and fine offsets are added together).
You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset,
and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is
clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine
offset.
Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

For instructions on specifying and calling work offsets, see Sections

"Defining zero offsets" and "Calling work offsets".
Coordinate You always program coordinate transformations for a specific

transformations sequence program. They are defined by:
• Translation
• Rotation
• Scaling
• Mirroring
(See Sec. "Defining the coordinate transformations")
Total offset The total offset is calculated from the sum of all offsets and coordinate
transformations.
2.7.1 Setting the zero offset
As an alternative to "Workpiece Zero-point," you can also save the

zero-point of the workpiece via "Set ZPO".
The offset (active zero-point offset or base offset) in which the new
zero-point is saved is set in machine data.
If the values are stored in the active work offset, they are stored in the
coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.
The currently active work offset is displayed under the position window
for the axes.
Traverse the machine axes to the desired position, e.g. to the

front surface of the workpiece (see Sec. "Traversing Axes").

2 2
2.7 Zero offsets
If you do not want to save the zero-point in the currently active

zero-point offset or in the base offset, select another zero-point
offset (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode").
Select the "Set WO" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Setting the base zero-point offset
Enter the desired new position value for Z or X or Y directly into

the actual value display. You can use the cursor keys to switch
between axes.
Press the "Input" key.
-or-
Press the "Z=0" softkey in case the position value is to be set to

Z=0
zero.
The new zero-point is saved in the currently active zero-point offset or

the base offset.
If you want to delete the saved zero-point, press the "Delete" softkey.
Delete

2 2
2.7 Zero offsets
2.7.2 Defining zero offsets
Enter work offsets (coarse and fine) directly in the work offset list.

The number of possible zero-point offsets is set in machine data.
Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating

section.
The work offset list appears.
Position the cursor on the coarse or fine offset that you wish to
define.
Enter the desired coordinates for the axis in question You can use
the cursor keys to switch between axes.
-or-
Set X Set Z
Press the "Set X", "Set Y" or "Set Z" softkey to accept the position
... value of an axis from the position display for a coarse offset.
-or-
Set Press the "Set all" softkey to accept the position values of all axes
all from the position display for a coarse offset.
The new coarse offset is set. The values from the fine offset are
included in the calculation and then deleted.
Delete Press the "Delete WO" softkey to delete the coarse and fine offset
WO values at the same time.
Further With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes
axes (2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These
additional axes must be activated via machine data.

2 2
2.7 Zero offsets
2.7.3 Zero offset list
The individual work offsets as well as the total offset are all displayed
in the work offset list. The currently active work offset is displayed on a
gray background. The work offset list also includes the current axis
positions in the machine and workpiece coordinate systems.
If the turning machine has a counter-spindle, a display in the column

completely to the right also shows which zero-point offset for the
machining with a counter-spindle was mirrored. If required, you can
also deselect the mirroring of the zero-point offset.
Work offset list
Base offset
Basic reference The coordinates of the base offset appear.
You can change these here in the list.
Zero offsets
ZPO1 ... ZPO4 The coordinates of the individual zero-point offsets (1st line coarse
offset, 2nd line fine offset) are displayed. You can change these at this
point in the list (see Sec. "Defining zero offsets").

2 2
2.7 Zero offsets
You can display more work offsets with the "Page Down" key.
Coordinate
transformations
Program The active coordinates of the "Offset" transformation are displayed as
well as the angle set in the "Rotation" transformation by which the
coordinate system rotates.
You cannot edit these values here.
Scale The active scaling factor for the "Scaling" transformation is displayed
for the respective axis.
Mirror The mirror axis that was defined by means of the "Mirroring"
transformation is displayed.
Total offset
Total The total offset resulting from the base offset and all active work
offsets and coordinate transformations appears.
Further With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes
axes (2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These
additional axes must be activated via machine data.

section.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
2.8 Manual mode

Always use "Machine Manual" mode when you want to set up the
machine for the execution of a program or to carry out simple
traversing movements on the machine.
2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle
Where preparatory actions in manual mode are concerned, the tool is

selected and the spindle controlled centrally in a single screen form.
In addition to the main spindle (S1), there is another tool spindle (S2)
for powered tools. Your turning machine can also be equipped with a
counter-spindle (S3).
In manual mode, you can select a tool on the basis of either its name
or its revolver location number. If you enter a number, ShopTurn first
searches for a name and then for a location number. This means that
if you enter "5", for example, and no tool with the name "5" exists, the
tool is selected from location number "5".
Using the revolver location number, therefore, you can swing around
an empty space into the machining position and then comfortably
install a new tool.
Selecting a tool
Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Enter the name or the number of the tool T.
-or-
Call up the tool list by pressing the "Tools" softkey or the "Offset"
Tools
-or- key.
-and-
Place the cursor on the required tool in the tool list.

Only one tool can be selected from the revolver.
-and-
Back to Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

manual
The tool is accepted into the "T, S, M... windows."
Select the tool cutting edge D or enter the number directly in the
field.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode

Cycle Start
The tool is automatically swung into the machining position and the
name of the tool displayed in the tool status bar.
Start spindle
Jog
Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-
spindle (S3) in the left input field of the spindle parameter.
Enter the desired spindle speed or cutting speed in the right-hand

entry field.
If the machine has a gearbox for the spindle, set the gearing step.
In the field below it, select the direction of spindle rotation:
Spindle rotates clockwise

Spindle rotates counter-clockwise
The M function is displayed next to the field.

Cycle Start
The spindle rotates.
Stopping the spindle

Jog
In the lower spindle field, select the "Spindle stop" function.

Cycle Start
The spindle stops.
Changing the spindle

speed
Jog
Specify the desired spindle speed.

Cycle Start
The spindle continues rotating at a new speed.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
Positioning the spindle

Jog
Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-
spindle (S3).
In the lower field, select the "Spindle position" function.
In the "Stop-Pos." parameter field, enter the desired spindle

position (in degrees).

Cycle Start
A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same
direction.
2.8.2 Traversing axes
You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis
keys or handwheels. During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the
selected axis moves by a specified increment with the programmed
setup feedrate.
Depending on the machine manufacturer’s settings, you can

simultaneously traverse the axes.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during traversing.
Traversing the axes

using the keyboard
If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").

Jog mode.
Enter the desired value for the "Set-up feedrate" parameter in

mm/min and mm/rev.
As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the
axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.
As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the
axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
You can move the axes in fixed or variable increments.
Press one of the keys [1], [10], ..., [10000], in order to traverse the
1 10000 axis in a fixed increment.
…
The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in
micrometers or micro-inches.
Example: For an increment of 100 µm
(= 0.1 mm), press the "100" key.
-or-
Jog mode.
-and-
-and-
Enter the desired value for the "Variable increment" parameter.
Example: For an increment of 500 µm
(= 0.5 mm), enter 500.
-and-
Press the "Inc Var" key.
VAR
Press an axis key in the corresponding direction.
+X Each time you press an axis key, the axis will traverse by the selected
increment.
If you want to traverse several axes simultaneously, you must press

the corresponding axis keys.
Traversing the axes with For information on the selection and function of the handwheels,
the handwheel please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
2.8.3 Positioning axes
In manual mode, you can traverse the axes to certain positions, in

order to implement simple machining sequences.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during traversing.
If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").
Select the "Position" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Enter the target position for the axis or axes to be traversed.
Specify the desired value for the feedrate F.
-or-
Rapid
Press the "Rapid traverse" key.
traverse
Cycle Start
The axis is traversed to the specified target position. If target positions
were specified for several axes, the axes are traversed
simultaneously.
2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece
Some blanks have a smooth or even surface. For example, you can
use the stock removal cycle to turn the face surface of the workpiece
before machining actually takes place.
The prerequisite for the simple stock removal of a workpiece in

manual mode is that a tool with known measurements is in the
machining position (see Sec. "Selecting a Tool and Spindle").
If you want to turn out a collet using the stock removal cycle, you can
program an undercut (XF2) in the corner.
Caution
The tool moves along a direct path to the start point of the stock
removal. First move the tool to a safe position in order to avoid
collisions during the approach.
You cannot use the "Repos" function during simple stock removal.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
Select the "Stock removal" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Enter values for the parameters.
The input screen form closes.
Stock removal in manual mode

Cycle Start
The "Stock removal" cycle is started.
You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and
correct the inputs.
Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

In the left input field of the parameter spindle, you can choose between the main
spindle (S1) and a counter spindle (S3). In the right input field, enter the spindle
speed or the cutting speed.
Machining Roughing
protection
Finishing
Position Stock removal position:
Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

parallel to
zurZZ-Achse
axis (longitudinal)
(Längs) zurXX-Achse
parallel to (Plan)
axis (plane)
Outside
Außen Innen
Inside Face
Stirnseite Rear
Rückseite
X X X X
Z Z Z Z
X X X X
Z Z Z Z
X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm
Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm
FS Chamfer (n=1...3) alternative to R mm
R Radius (n=1...3) alternative to FS mm
XF2 Undercut (alternative to FS2 or R2) mm
D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode
For manual mode, you can select the central machine functions and
work offsets and set the unit of measurement.
Machine functions (M functions) are functions such as "Close door" or
"Release collet," for example, that were made available as extras by
the machine manufacturer.
In manual mode, you can display the axis positions and distance-
defining parameters either in "mm" or "inches". However, tool offsets
and zero-point offsets remain in the original unit of measure, in which
the machine was set (see Sec. "Switching the Unit of Measure
(Millimeters/Inches)").
Selecting an M function

Jog
Enter the number of the desired M function in the "Misc M fct."

parameter field.
Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation
between the meaning and number of the function.
Example:
M function Description
... ...
M88 Close door
... ...
"88" must be entered in the input field,
so that the door will be closed.
The M function will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start"
key.
Selecting work offset

Jog
Select the desired zero-point offset.
-or-
Work Press the "Work offset” softkey.

offset
-and-

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
Back to -and-
manual
Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
The work offset will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start"
key.
Setting the unit of

measurement
Jog
Select the unit of measure.
The unit of measurement will be active in manual mode the next time
you press the "Cycle Start" key.

2 2
2.9 MDA
2.9 MDA
In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic mode), you can enter G-code
commands block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting
up the machine.
When executing the G-code commands, you can control the sequence
as follows:
• Executing the program block-by-block
• Testing the program
• Setting the test-run feedrate
(see Sec. "Machining the workpiece")
Press the "MDA" key.

MDA
The MDA editor opens.
MDA
Input the desired G-code commands using the operator’s

keyboard.

Cycle Start
The control executes the input blocks.
Delete Depending on the machine manufacturer’s setting, the program

MDA Prog. created in MDA mode is automatically deleted after the complete
execution, or you can delete it using the "Delete MDA Prog." softkey.

2 2
2.10 Run times
2.10 Run times

ShopTurn provides a status window so that you can have an overview
of the most important machine run times at any time. It shows the
following operating times.
Program Measurement of the program run time starts as soon as you press the
"Cycle Start" key and stops on NC Stop or NC Reset.
If you start a new program, timing starts again from the beginning.
Timing continues if dwell time is active, or during program runs with

program test or dry run feedrate. Upon NC-Stop or feedrate override =
0, the timing stops.
Loaded By means of a program progress display, you can track what

percentage of the called up program has already loaded.
The display only appears when a program or subroutine is called up
via an EXTCALL command or if a program is executed from the hard-
disk.
Workpiece The current repetition and the programmed number of program

repetitions (e.g. Workpiece: 15/100) are displayed in work-step and G-
code programs. In work-step programs, the number appears, but only
if the number of programmed repetitions N is greater than 1 (see Sec.
"Specifying the Quantity").
After a programmed number of repetitions (100,000), only the current
program repetition is displayed due to lack of space (e.g. workpiece:
15).
If no information is yet available about the current program repetition,
only two dashes are displayed (e.g. Workpiece: - -/100).
After the start of a program, the counter shows 0 for the current
repetition.
For counting workpieces, specify the actual and desired numbers of

workpieces as pre-settings (see Sec. "Parameterize workpiece
counter").
Time The current time is displayed here.
Date Today's date is displayed.
Machine The machine run time displays how much time has elapsed since the
control was last switched on.
Machining The machining time displays the total run time of all programs
executed since the control was last switched on.
Machine statistic The system calculates the actual machine utilization from the timed
machining time and the current machine run time.
The ratio of machining time to machine run time is displayed as a
percentage.

2 2
2.10 Run times
A setting in the machine data determines which run times are

displayed.
Select "Machine Manual" or "Machine Auto" mode.

Jog Auto
or
Run times Press the "Run times" softkey.
The T,F,S display window turns into the "Run times" window.
Pressing the "Run times" softkey again, takes you back to the T,F,S
display window.

3 3
01/2008 Machining the workpiece
Machining the workpiece
3.1 Starting/stopping machining...................................................................................... 3-90
3.2 Running in a program ............................................................................................... 3-93
3.3 Displaying the current program block ....................................................................... 3-94
3.4 Repositioning axes.................................................................................................... 3-95
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point.......................................................... 3-96
3.6 Controlling the program sequence.......................................................................... 3-101
3.7 Overstoring.............................................................................................................. 3-103
3.8 Testing a program................................................................................................... 3-104
3.9 Correcting a program .............................................................................................. 3-105
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions....................................................................... 3-106
3.11 Simulating machining.............................................................................................. 3-107

3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece .......................................................... 3-109
3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece ..................................... 3-110
3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining ............................................ 3-111
3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program...................................................... 3-112
3.11.5 Different workpiece views ....................................................................................... 3-113
3.11.6 Changing the cutout................................................................................................ 3-117
3.12 Settings for automatic mode ................................................................................... 3-119

3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate..................................................................................... 3-119
3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter ................................................................... 3-120

3 3
Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.1 Starting/stopping machining

During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in
accordance with the programming on the machine.
After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining
is performed automatically.
You must load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Only then can
you start it. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then
resume execution later. Apart from this, you have the option of
graphically displaying the execution on the screen.
Once the program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, and "Automatic"

mode is also activated on the machine control panel, you can start the
program whatever your current operating area, even if you are not in
"Machine Auto" mode.
This start option must be enabled in a machine data code.
The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program:

• The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the
machine.
• A program created in ShopTurn is available.
• The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered.
• The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine
manufacturer are activated.
Sequence programs that you created in earlier versions of ShopTurn

can also be executed in your current version. Once an older sequence
program has been executed in the current version of ShopTurn, it is
treated as a current ShopTurn program.
Select program (total)
Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

-or- The directory overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you
want to select.

3 3
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The program overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the required program.
Press the "Execute" softkey.

Execute
ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads
the program.
Select program
(by program block)
Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you
want to select.

Place the cursor on the required program.

-or- The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
machining plan of the program is displayed.
Place the cursor on the program block at which the program run
must begin.
ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode, loads the

program, and carries out a block search to the highlighted program
block (see Section "Starting at a Specific Point in the Program").

3 3
Example for the program view in "Machine Auto" mode
When you select a program for the first time for execution, that
contains the cycles "Stock removal towards contour" or "Contour
pocket", the individual stock removal steps or solid machining steps
for the contour pocket are calculated automatically. This process may
take several seconds depending on the complexity of the contour.
Starting machining

Cycle Start
The program is started and executed from the beginning or from the
highlighted program block.
Stopping machining
Press the "Cycle Stop" key.
Cycle Stop
Machining stops immediately, individual blocks do not finish execution.
At the next start, execution is resumed at the same location where it
stopped.
Canceling machining
Press the "Reset" key.
Reset Execution of the program is interrupted. On the next start, machining
will start from the beginning.
Starting program The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode and "Automatic" mode
execution from an is activated on the machine control panel.
operating area
Cycle Start
The program is started and executed from the beginning. However,
the interface of the previously selected operating area remains on the
screen.

3 3
3.2 Running in a program
3.2 Running in a program

When running-in a program, ShopTurn can interrupt the machining of
the workpiece after each program block, which triggers a movement or
auxiliary function on the machine. In this way, you can control the
machining result block-by-block during the initial run-through of a
program on the machine.
For drilling and pocket milling, the entire machining process and a
plane machining process (respectively) are compiled into one block.
Drilling and pocket machining processes can be split up into single
blocks using the "Single block fine" function. In addition, machining at
this setting is stopped after each individual contour element of a
contour.
Single block Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

"Starting/stopping program execution").
Press the "Single Block" key.

Single Block

Cycle Start
The first block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops.
In the channel status line, the text “Stop: Block in single block ended"
appears.

Cycle Start
The next block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops
again.
Press the "Single Block" key again, if the machining is not

Single Block supposed to run block-by-block. (The key is then deselected
again.)
If you now press the "Cycle Start" key again, the program is executed
to the end without interruption.
Single block, fine Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
Press the softkeys "Prog. Cntrl.“ and "Single Block Fine," in order
Single
Block Fine to execute each individual drilling position and each individual
pocket milling movement as its own block.
Press the "Single Block" key.

Single Block
Continue as described under "Single Block".

3 3
3.3 Displaying the current program block
3.3 Displaying the current program block

If you want precise information about axis positions and key G
functions during a trial run or execution of the program, you can show
the basic block display.
You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when
machining the workpiece on the machine. All G code commands that
initiate a function on the machine are displayed in the "Basic block"
window for the currently active program block:
• Absolute axis positions
• G functions for the first G group
• Other modal G functions
• Other programmed addresses
• M functions
The basic block display function must be set up by the machine

manufacturer.
¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

¾ Press the "Basic Block" softkey.

Basic Block
¾ Press the "Single Block" key if you wish to execute the program
Single Block block by block.
¾ Start program execution.

Cycle Start
The precise axis positions, modal G functions, etc., are displayed in
the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block.

3 3
3.4 Repositioning axes
3.4 Repositioning axes

After a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool
breaks) you can move the tool away from the contour in manual
mode. ShopTurn saves the coordinates of the position at the time of
the interruption and displays the path differences that the axes
traversed in manual mode in the actual value window. This path
difference is called "Repos-offset".
Using the "Repos" function, you can return the tool to the contour in
order to continue executing the program.
You cannot traverse the interrupt position, because it is blocked by the

control system.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect.
Warning
When repositioning, the axes move with the programmed feedrate and
linear interpolation, i.e. in a straight line from the current position to the
interrupt point. Therefore, you must first move the axes to a safe
position in order to avoid collisions.
If you do not use the "Repos" function and subsequently move the
axes in manual mode after a program interrupt, ShopTurn
automatically moves the axes during the switch to automatic mode
and the subsequent start of the machining process in a straight line
back to the interrupt point.
The following prerequisites must be met when repositioning the axes:

• The program execution was interrupted using "Cycle Stop".
• The axes were moved from the interrupt point to another position in
manual mode.
Press the "Repos" key.

Repos
Select each axis that is to be moved sequentially in the

+X corresponding direction.
The axes are moved to the interrupt position.

3 3
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

If you only want to execute a particular section of a program on the
machine, there is no obligation to start execution of the program from
the beginning; you can also start processing from a specific program
block or text string.
The point in the program at which you wish to start machining is called
the "target".
ShopTurn distinguishes between 3 different types of targets:
• ShopTurn cycle
• Misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block
• Any text
For target type "misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block", you can
again specify the target on 3 different paths:
• Position cursor on target block
This is ideal for straightforward programs.
• Choose point of interruption
Machining resumes at the point at which it was interrupted earlier.
This is especially convenient in large programs with multiple
program levels.
• Specify target directly
This option is only possible if you know the precise data (program
level, program name etc.) of the target.
After specifying the target, ShopTurn then calculates the exact start
point for the program execution.
For the target types "ShopTurn cycle" and "any text" the calculation is
always done to the end point of the block. When calculating the start
point of all other ShopTurn blocks and G-code blocks, you can choose
between four variants.
Calculation variants 1. Calculation to contour:

During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations
as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from
the start of the target block, identically to normal program
execution.
2. Calculation to end point:

During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations
as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from
the end of the target block or from the next programmed position of
the target block.

3 3
3. Without calculation
During the block search, ShopTurn does not perform any
calculations, i.e. calculation is skipped until the target block. The
parameters within the control contain the values valid before the
block search.
This option is only available for programs that exclusively comprise
G code blocks.
4. External - without calculation

This method is performed in the same way as calculation to end
point, except that subroutines called via EXTCALL are skipped in
the calculation. In the same way, with G code programs that are
executed entirely by external drives (disk drive/network drive),
calculation is skipped until the target block is reached.
This helps to speed up the calculation process.
Notice
Modal functions included in the part of the program that is not
calculated are not taken into account for the part of the program to be
executed. In other words, with the "Without calculation" and "External
– without calculation" methods, you should choose a target block after
which all the information needed for machining is included.
Specifying a target In the "Search pointer" screen form, directly specify the target for the
directly target type "miscellaneous ShopTurn block or G-code block."
Each line of the screen form represents one program level. The actual
number of levels in the program depends on the nesting depth of the
program. Level 1 always corresponds to the main program and all
other levels correspond to subroutines.
You must enter the target in the line of the screen form corresponding
to the program level in which the target is located. For example, if the
target is located in the subroutine called directly from the main
program, you must enter the target in program level 2.
The specified target must always be unambiguous. This means, for
example, that if the subroutine is called in the main program in two
different places, you must also specify a target in program level 1
(main program).
The parameters in the "Search pointer" screen form have the following
meaning:
Number of program level
Program: Program name (the name of the main program is
automatically entered.)
Ext: File extension
P: Continuous counter (if part of a program is repeated
several times, you can specify the repetition number
at which you wish machining to be resumed.)

3 3
Line: Parameter is given by ShopTurn

Type: " " Search target is ignored on this level
N no. Block number
Marker Jump marker
Text Character string
Sub-r. Subprogram call
Line Line number
Search target: Point in the program at which machining is to start
Selecting the ShopTurn

cycle
Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
Position the cursor on the desired target block.
Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Start
search run
Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks,
select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window.
The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.
Press the "Accept" softkey.
For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired
starting position.
During the block search run on the position pattern, the skipped
positions are not counted.

Cycle Start
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.
Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then
machined from the beginning of the target block.
You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Reset

3 3
Selecting the misc. Position cursor on target block

ShopTurn block or
G-code block
Position the cursor on the desired target block.
Press the "Block search" softkey.
To External - Select a calculation technique.

contour ... without cal.

Cycle Start

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. The program executes from
the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation
technique.

Reset
Select point of interruption

Program execution must have been interrupted by pressing the
"Reset" key. (ShopTurn automatically remembers this point of
interruption)
Switch back to "Machine Auto" mode.
Search
Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.
pointer
Interrupt Press the "Interrupt point" softkey.

point
ShopTurn inserts the saved interrupt point as a target.


Cycle Start

Cycle Start
technique.

Reset

3 3
Specify target directly

Search
Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.
pointer
Specify the desired target.


Cycle Start

Cycle Start
technique.

Reset
Searching for any text

Press the "Block search" and "Search" softkeys.

Search
Enter the text string that you want to locate.
Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the

program or the current cursor position.
Search Press the "Search" softkey.
The program block that contains the text string is marked.
Continue Press the "Continue search" softkey, if you want to continue the
search search.
Start Press the "Abort" and "Start search run" softkeys.

search run
Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks,

select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window
and press the "Accept" softkey.
For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired
starting position and press the "Accept" softkey.

3 3
3.6 Controlling the program sequence
¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then
machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset

If you want to check previously obtained results while machining a
workpiece, you can have the machining stop at specially marked
points (programmed stop). Within the sequence program, the stop
occurs at the “safety distance” position.
Conversely, if you do not want to execute certain machining steps

programmed in G codes on every program run, you can mark these
blocks accordingly (skip G code blocks). This is not possible with
sequence blocks.
You can also choose to allow DRF offsets, i.e. offsets with the
handwheel, during machining. This function must be set up by the
machine manufacturer.
Programmed stop ¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

¾ Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.
Program. ¾ Press the "Program. stop" softkey.

stop
Cycle Start
Execution of the program starts. The program stops at each block for
which the G-code command "M01" was programmed (see Sec. "G-
code in the sequence program").
¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key again each time.

Cycle Start
Execution of the program is continued.
Program. ¾ Press the "Program. stop" softkey again if you want the program
stop to be executed without a programmed stop. (The softkey is
deactivated again.)

3 3
Skipping G code blocks Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see the section titled
Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.
Skip Press the "Skip" softkey.

Cycle Start
Execution of the program starts. G code blocks with the "/" character
(slash) in front of the block number are not executed.
Skip Press the "Skip" softkey again if you want the marked G code
blocks to be executed again during the next run. (The softkey is
deactivated again.)
Allowing DRF offset Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
DRF Press the "DRF offset" softkey.

offset
Cycle Start
Execution of the program starts. Offsets with the handwheel affect the
machining process directly.
DRF Press the "DRF offset" softkey again if you no longer want to allow
offset
handwheel offsets during machining. (The softkey is deactivated
again.)

3 3
3.7 Overstoring
3.7 Overstoring
In "Machine Auto" mode, you can overstore technological parameters
(auxiliary functions, programmable instructions, etc.) in the work
storage unit of the NCK. You can also enter and execute any NC
block.
Overstore does not alter the programs stored in the part program
memory.
Overstore with single

block
¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section
"Selecting a program for execution").
¾ Press the "Single Block" key to execute the program block by

Single Block block.
The program automatically stops at the next block boundary.

¾ Press the "Overstore" softkey.
The "Overstore" window is opened.

¾ Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start
The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution
in the "Overstore" window.
After "Overstore", a subroutine with the content REPOSA, which you
can observe, is executed.
Overstore without single

block
¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section
"Selecting a program for execution").
¾ Press the "Cycle Stop" key.

Cycle Stop
¾ Press the "Overstore" softkey.
The "Overstore" window is opened.

¾ Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start

3 3
3.8 Testing a program
The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution
of the blocks in the "Overstore" window.
After the entered blocks have been executed, you can append blocks
again.
Stopping overstore
Press the "Back" key to exit "Overstore".
The window is closed.

You can switch modes now.
After you have pressed "Cycle Start" again, the selected program
Cycle Start continues before overstore.
3.8 Testing a program

To prevent incorrect machining of the workpiece during the first pass
of the program on the machine, first test the program without moving
the machine axes.
During testing, ShopTurn checks the program for the following

inadmissible conditions:
• Geometric incompatibility
• Missing data
• Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps
• Violation of working area
ShopTurn automatically detects syntax errors when it is loading a

program in "Machine Auto" mode.
Whether ShopTurn executes auxiliary functions (M and H functions)

during the program test is dependent upon the machine
manufacturer’s settings.
The following functions can be used during the program test:

• Stop execution with “Programmed Stop” (see Section “Controlling
the program run”)
• Graphical display on the screen (see Section "Simultaneous
recording before machining a workpiece")

3 3
3.9 Correcting a program

Program Press the "Program test" softkey.

test
Cycle Start
The program is tested without traversing of the machine axes.
Program Press the "Program test" softkey again to deactivate test mode on
test completion of the program. (The softkey is deactivated again.)
3.9 Correcting a program

As soon as ShopTurn detects a syntax error while loading a program
in "Machine Auto" mode, the error is displayed in the alarm line. You
can then correct the program in the program editor.
Depending on whether the program is in the NC stop or reset state

after being interrupted by ShopTurn, you can make various
corrections.
• NC Stop status:
You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed on the
machine or read by the NCK.
• Reset status:
You can modify all blocks.
Press the "Prog. corr.” softkey
The program appears in the "Program" operating area and the

erroneous block is highlighted.
Press the "Right cursor" key.
The parameter screen form is displayed.
Input the corrections.
The correction is applied to the current program.
The program is reloaded in "Machine Auto" mode and you can start
the machining of the workpiece.

3 3
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions

While the workpiece is being machined, if you want to know, for
example, whether the tool tip radius compensation is currently active
or which unit of measurement is being used, you can activate display
of the G functions or auxiliary functions.
16 different G groups are displayed under "G function". Within a G-

group, only the G functions that are currently active in the NCK
appear. In addition, you can see the currently active transformation in
the top line of the window.
As an alternative, all G groups with all associated G functions are

listed in "All G Func.".
Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the

machine manufacturer, which pass parameters to the PLC to trigger
reactions defined by the manufacturer.
A maximum of five M functions and three H functions are displayed.
You can have the G functions that are currently active in the NCK
displayed during execution of a sequence program too, since the
ShopTurn functions are internally translated into G-code.
G function Press the "G function" softkey in "Machine Manual" or "Machine

Auto" mode.
Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active G functions

within a G group will be displayed.
If you press the "G function" softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display
reappears.
-or-
All G Press the "All G func." softkey.

func.
Instead of parameters T, F and S, all G groups with G functions are
now listed. If you select the "All G func." softkey again, the "T, F, S"
status display reappears.
-or-
Auxiliary Press the "Auxiliary function" softkey.

function
Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active auxiliary
functions will be displayed. If you press the "Auxiliary function" softkey
again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

3 3
3.11 Simulating machining

You can graphically display the execution of the program on the
screen, in order to easily control the programming result without
moving the machine axes. In this way, you can detect incorrectly
programmed machining steps early on and prevent erroneous
machining of the workpiece.
In addition, you can conveniently track the machining of the workpiece
on the machine via the graphical display, if the view of the working
area is blocked by coolant, for example.
In this graphical display, ShopTurn shows the workpiece, the tools, the
counterspindle and the headstock on the screen in the correct
proportions, i.e. the programmed blank dimensions from the program
header are used for the workpiece and the tools are displayed with
various symbols, depending on the the tool type and size. For
displaying the counter spindle and headstock, the dimensions are
taken from the “spindle” input screen form (see Sec. "Spindles").
For the graphical display of G-code programs, ShopTurn displays a

pre-defined blank shape, which you can modify as you wish.
Finished-part contour If you have programmed turning machining processes in the main
program, ShopTurn displays the corresponding finished-part contour
for them at the start of the graphical display. Thus, you can easily
compare the current contour with the finished-part contour, and also
detect where possible residual material might remain when machining.
Display variants You can choose between three variants of graphical display:
• Simulation before machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can
graphically display the execution of the program in a quick run-
through. The machine axes do not move during this.
• Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can
graphically display the execution of the program with a test run
feedrate. The machine axes do not move during this. In contrast to
the simulation, you can use the functions for program control, i.e.
you can stop the graphical execution or have it run block-by-block.
• Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
While the program is being executed on the machine, you can
track the machining of the workpiece on the screen as well.

3 3
Views For all three variants, the following views are available:
• 3-window view
• Side view
• Face view
• Volume model
The traverse paths for the tools are shown in color:

Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse
Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate
In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The

displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the
approximate time that would actually be required to execute the
machining program on the machine (incl. tool change).
If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock
stops.
In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program
block currently being executed are also displayed.
The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also
displayed in the simulation.
Transformations Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and

simultaneous recording:
• Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed
as programmed.
• In the graphical display, zero-point offsets (G54, ...) only lead to
the offsetting of the zero-point in the Z direction.
Counter spindle If you open or close the collet of the main spindle or counter-spindle
during programming via M functions, ShopTurn can only display this
graphically if the M functions are assigned via machine data cycles.

3 3
3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically

display the execution of the program in a quick run-through on the
screen in order to easily monitor the result of the programming.
Feedrate override is also active during simulation.

0%: The simulation stops.
≥ 100%: The program is executed as fast as possible.
Feedrate override for simulation must be activated via a machine data
code.
Starting the simulation
¾ Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

¾ Place the cursor on the directory in which you would like to

simulate a program.
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

¾ Place the cursor on the program that you would like to simulate.
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

-or- The selected program is displayed in the "Program" operating area.
¾ Press the "Simulation" softkey.
Program processing will be graphically displayed on the screen. The

machine axes do not move during this.
Details Single ¾ Press the "Details" and "Single Block" softkeys if you wish to
Block process the program block by block.

3 3
Stop simulation
Press the "Stop" softkey.
Simulation is stopped.
Aborting simulation
Press the "Reset" softkey.
Simulation is aborted and the unmachined blank shape of the

workpiece is displayed again.
Resuming simulation
Press "Start" softkey.
Simulation is resumed.
End simulation
End
Press the "End" softkey.
The machining plan or programming graphic for the program is

displayed again.
3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically

display the execution of the program on the screen in order to easily
monitor the result of the programming.
Simultaneous recording is a software option.
You can replace the programmed feedrate with a test-run feedrate in

order to control the execution speed (see Sec. "Establishing the test-
run feedrate").
In addition, you can interrupt or control the graphical execution, i.e.

the functions for program control such as "NC Stop," "Single Block,"
"Feedrate override," etc. are in effect.
If you would like to view the current program blocks again instead of
the graphical display, you can switch to the program view.
This function must be set-up via machine data.

3 3

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Program test" softkeys.

Program
test
Dry run Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey, if the programmed feedrate
feedrate speed is to be replaced by a test-run speed.
Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start
Program processing will be graphically displayed on the screen. The
machine’s axes do not move.
Dry run Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey again, if the parallel drawing
feedrate is to run in the programmed feedrate speed. (The softkey is
deactivated again.)
Program Press the "Program view" softkey if you would like to switch away
view from the graphical display into the program view of the "Machine
Auto" mode.
Recording of the graphical data continues in the background.
Press one of the 4 softkeys for the graphical views, if you would
… like to return to the graphical display.
3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining
If the view of the work space is blocked by coolant, for example, while
the workpiece is being machined, you can also track the program
processing on the screen.
Simultaneous recording is a software option.
You can switch on the function for simultaneous recording of the

machining process even if workpiece machining has already begun to
take place on the machine.
This function must be set-up via machine data.

3 3

Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start
Workpiece machining is started and graphically displayed on the
screen.
3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program
G-code programs typically do not contain a description of the shape of

the blank. For the graphical display, ShopTurn therefore uses a pre-
defined shape for the blank. You can modify it as you wish.
Select "Simulation" or "Real-sim."

-or-
Details
Press the softkeys "Side View" and "Details".
>
Settings
Press the "Settings" softkey.
Select the shape of the blank (cylinder, tube, square, or N-angle).
Input the desired dimensions.
Press the "Back" softkey.
During the next graphical display of a G-code program, the input

dimensions are taken into consideration.

3 3
3.11.5 Different workpiece views
In the graphical display, you can choose between different views so

that you constantly have the best view of the current workpiece
machining, or in order to display details or the overall view of the
finished workpiece.
The following views are available:

• Side view
The display shows the workpiece, partly in the longitudinal view,
and partly the peripheral surface.
• Face view
The workpiece is displayed in cross-section. The face of the
workpiece is displayed by default. The viewing direction is always
from the front to the cutting surface even if machining is to be
performed from behind or from the back side.
• Volume model
The volume model is a 3-D display of the workpiece that does not
appear while the simulation is running but only if you stop the
simulation.
The volume model is a software option.
• 3-window view
The 3-window view shows the side and front view and, on the PCU
50.3, a volume model. A cut-away change occurs synchronously
for the side and front view. The cut-away of the volume model
cannot be changed here.
In the volume model, ShopTurn only displays drilling and milling
work continuously. The turning work is only updated when you
change to drilling or milling work.
You can still move the displayed cutout in any view.
If there is no longer sufficient storage space for the graphical display,

ShopTurn fades out the blank. You can still see the side and front
view as dashed-line graphics.

3 3
Side view
Press the "side view" softkey.
Side view
You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing

the cut-away".

3 3
Face view
Press the "Face view” softkey.
Face view
Details Press the "Details" softkey, if you want to pan the cross-section in
> the Z direction.
-and-
Z Cut
Press the "Z Cut +" or "Page Up" key in order to pan the cross-
+ or section in a positive Z direction.
-or-
Z Cut Press the "Z Cut -" or "Page Down" key in order to pan the cross-
- or section in a negative Z direction.
You can find further information on changing the cut-away in

Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

3 3
Volume model
¾ Press the "Volume model” softkey.
Volume model
Displaying the volume model

¾ Press the "Stop" softkey if you would like to display the volume
model at the current point in the machining.
¾ Press the "Side view" and "Start" softkeys if you would like to
continue the simulation.
Changing the view

Details ¾ Press the "Details" softkey if you want to change the view.
>
-and-
¾ Press the "View Å" or "View Æ" softkey to rotate the workpiece
or about the X axis.
-or-
¾ Press the "View 3" softkey to rotate the workpiece about the
Z axis.
-or-
Cut ¾ Press the "Cut" softkey to cut up the workpiece.
-and-
Cut ¾ Press the "Cut" softkey again if the volume model is to be

displayed in full again.
You can find further information on changing the cut-away in

Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

3 3
3-window view
¾ Press the "3-window view” softkey.
3-window view
You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing

the cut-away".
3.11.6 Changing the cutout
If you would like to pan, enlarge, or decrease the size of the cut-away
on the graphical display, e.g. to view details or display the complete
workpiece, use the Zoom or magnifying glass.
Increase or decrease the size of the existing cut-away from the center
using the zoom function. Then you can pan the new cut-away.
Using the magnifying glass, you can first define the cut-away and then
increase or decrease its size.
The zoom/magnifying settings are program-specific, i.e. the settings

are retained if you change the cut-away and switch to the work plan
and then back to the graphics, for example. If you then simulate the
new program, ShopTurn will use the default settings of zoom and the
magnifying glass.
But you can also return to the default display of the workpiece from a
changed cut-away.
In addition, you can delete the previously drawn machining lines in the
graphics in order to get a clear display.

3 3
Details ¾ Press the "Details" softkey.

>
Original cut-away
Back to ¾ Press the "Back to original" softkey to restore the original size of
original the viewport.
The workpiece on the main spindle or counter-spindle appears.
Zoom
¾ Press the "Zoom +" or "+" softkey if you would like to enlarge the
Zoom
+ or
+ cut-away.
-or-
Zoom ¾ Press the "Zoom -" or "-" softkey if you would like to decrease the
- or size of the cut-away.
-or-
¾ Press a cursor key if you want to pan the cut-away up, down, left,
or right.
The new cut-away appears.
Magnifying glass
Magnifying ¾ Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.
glass
A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.
¾ Press a cursor key if you want to move the magnifying glass up,
down, left, or right.
Magnifying ¾ Press the "Magnifying glass +" softkey if you want to enlarge the
glass + cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.
-or-
Magnifying ¾ Press the "Magnifying glass -" softkey if you want to decrease the
glass - size of the cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.
Magnifying ¾ Press the "Magnifying glass zoom” softkey.

glass zoom
The new cut-away appears.
Deleting machining lines

¾ Press the "Del" key.
The previous machining lines are deleted.

3 3
3.12 Settings for automatic mode
For automatic mode, configure the pre-settings for the following

functions:
• Program sequence under Automatic
For graphical display of a program, the feedrate of the test-run can
be specified.
• Workpiece counter
For counting workpieces in G-code programs, counters are
available, which display the number of needed workpieces as well
as the total number of workpieces produced.
3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate
Before machining a workpiece, test the program without moving the

machine axes. For early detection of programming errors, the parallel
drawing function is available to you. For this, you can use your own
preset test-run feedrate (see Section "Parallel drawing before
machining the workpiece").
The feedrate can be changed while the operation is running.
Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal

Auto softkey bar.
In "Test-run feedrate", enter the desired test-run speed.

3 3
3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter
With the aid of the "ShopTurn Settings," you can control the counter
activation and the time of the zeroing.
The display of the needed and currently machined workpieces is
displayed in the machine run-time window (see Section "Run-times").
Number of workpieces
Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal softkey

Auto bar.
Enter the number of workpieces needed in the "Desired

workpieces" field.
The number of workpieces finished since the program started is

displayed in the "Actual workpieces" field.
After the defined number of workpieces is reached, the current
workpieces display is automatically reset to zero.
The choice of counter depends on the machine data setting.

The desired and actual numbers for the workpiece counter can also
be changed during program execution.

4 4
01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
Creating a ShopTurn program
4.1 Program structure ................................................................................................... 4-122
4.2 Fundamentals ......................................................................................................... 4-124

4.2.1 Machining planes .................................................................................................... 4-124
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction ............................................................... 4-126
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions .................................................................... 4-128
4.2.5 Pocket calculator..................................................................................................... 4-131
4.2.6 Adjustments ............................................................................................................ 4-133
4.3 Sequence program ................................................................................................. 4-134

4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 4-134
4.3.2 Creating a new program ......................................................................................... 4-136
4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-140
4.3.4 Changing program blocks ....................................................................................... 4-144
4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-145
4.3.6 Specifying a quantity............................................................................................... 4-148

4 4
Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.1 Program structure

A sequence program is divided into three sub-areas:
• Program header
• Program blocks
• End of program
These sub-areas form a machining plan.
Program
header
Program
blocks
Program
end
Program structure
Program header The program header contains parameters that affect the entire
program, such as blank dimensions or retraction planes.
Program blocks You determine the individual machining steps in the program blocks.
In doing this, you specify the technology data and positions, among
other things.
Technology data and

positions
Plain text, e.g. type
of machining
Block number allocated

by control
Symbol of machining cycle

Program block
Linked program blocks For the "Contour turning", "Contour milling", "Milling", and "Drilling"
functions, program the technology blocks and contours or positioning
blocks separately. These program blocks are automatically linked by
the controller and connected by brackets in the work plan.
In the technology blocks, specify how and in what form the machining
should take place, e.g. centering first, and then drilling. In the
positioning blocks, determine the positions for the drilling or milling
machining, e.g. position the drill-holes in a full circle on the front
surface.

4 4
Technology blocks
Positioning blocks
Technology block and positioning block
Contours
Technology blocks
Contour and technology block

End of program End of program signals to the machine that the machining of the
workpiece has ended. In addition, you can specify the number of
workpieces that you would like to machine.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.1 Machining planes
A workpiece can be machined on different planes. Two coordinate

axes define a machining plane. On turning machines with X, Z, and C
axes, three planes are available:
• Turning
• Face
• Peripheral
The face and peripheral machining planes require the CNC-ISO

functions "Front surface machining" (Transmit) and "Cylindrical
peripheral transformation" (Tracyl) to be set up.
These functions are a software option.
For turning machines with an additional Y axis, the machining planes

are expanded to include two more planes:
• Face Y
• Peripheral Y
Therefore, the face and peripheral planes are called Face C and
Peripheral C.
If the Y axis is an oblique axis (i.e. the axis is not perpendicular to the
others), you can also select the "Face Y" and "Peripheral Y"
machining planes and program the traversing movements in Cartesian
coordinates. The control system then automatically transforms the
programmed traversing movements of the Cartesian coordinate
system into the traversing movements of the oblique axis.
For the transformation of the programmed traversing movements,
ShopTurn needs the CNC-ISO function "Oblique Axis" (Traang).
This function is a software option.
The machining plane selection is integrated into the parameter screen

forms of the individual drilling and milling cycles. For turning cycles
and for "axial drilling" and "axial threads", ShopTurn automatically
selects the Turning plane. For the "straight" and "circle" functions, you
must specify the machining plane separately.
The settings for the machining plane always act modally, i.e. until you
select another plane.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
The machining planes are defined as follows:
Y
X
ce
Fa
Pe
r
su iphe
rfa ral
ce Tu
rni
ng
Machining planes
Turning The Turning machining plane corresponds to the Z/X plane (G18).
Face/Face C The Face/Face C machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane

(G17).
For machines without a Y axis, however, the tools can only move in
the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the X/Y
coordinates you entered into a movement in the X and C axis.
You can use face surface machining with a C axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket on the face surface.
You can choose between the forward or rear face surface for this
purpose.
Peripheral/Peripheral C The Peripheral/Peripheral C machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z

plane (G19). For machines without a Y axis, however, the tools can
only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically
transforms the Y/Z coordinates you entered into a movement in the C
and Z axis.
You can use peripheral surface machining with a C axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a slot with constant depth on
the peripheral surface. You can choose between the inner or outer
surface for this purpose.
Face Y The Face Y machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17).
You can use the face surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket on the front surface.
You can choose between the forward or rear face surface for this
purpose.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Peripheral Y The Peripheral Y machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z plane

(G19).
You can use peripheral surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket with a level bottom on
the peripheral or create drill holes that do not point to the center. You
can choose between the inner or outer surface for this purpose.
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction
Approaching and retracting during the machining cycle always follows

the same pattern if you have not defined a special approach/retraction
cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/retraction cycle"). If the
machine has a tailstock, you can also take this into consideration
when traversing.
The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the
subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of
the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the
approach/retraction cycle").
When selecting the traversing paths, ShopTurn always takes the tool
tip into account; i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into
consideration. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes
are an appropriate distance away from the workpiece.
Tool change point
Retract plane
Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate
Safety distance
Machining cycle approach/return

• The tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest path from the
tool change point to the retraction plane, which runs parallel to the
machining plane.
• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance.
• Following this, the workpiece is machined at the programmed
machining feedrate.
• After machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to the
safety distance.
• The tool then continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the
retraction plane.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
• From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest
path to the tool change point.
If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining
processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next
machining cycle.
The spindle (main, tool, or counter-spindle) begins to rotate

immediately after the tool change.
You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, and the safety
distance in the program header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").
Taking the tailstock into

Tool change point
consideration
Retract plane
XR
Safety distance
Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate
Approach/return allowing for a tailstock

• The tool travels in rapid traverse from the tool change point along
the shortest path to the protective plane XR from the tailstock.
• After this, the tool moves in rapid traverse on the retraction plane in
the X direction.
• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance.
• Following this, the workpiece is machined at the programmed
machining feedrate.
• After machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to the
safety distance.
• The tool then continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the
retraction plane.
• After this, the tool travels in the direction X to the protective plane
XR from the tailstock.
• From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest
path to the tool change point.
If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining
processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next
machining cycle.
You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, the safety
distance, and the protective area for the tailstock in the program
header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions
When creating a sequence program, you can input positions in

absolute or incremental dimensions, depending on how the workpiece
drawing is scaled.
You can also use a combination of absolute and incremental

dimensions, i.e. one coordinate as an absolute dimension and the
other as an incremental dimension.
For the plan axis (the X axis, in this case), in the machine data it is
established whether the diameter or radius is programmed in absolute
or incremental dimensions.
Absolute dimensions With absolute dimensions, all position specifications refer to the zero
(ABS) point of the active coordinate system.
P4
P3 P2
Ø 60
P1
Ø 40
Ø 25
7.5 Z
15
25
35
Absolute dimensions
The position specifications for the points P1 to P4 in absolute
dimensions refer to the zero-point:
P1: X25 Z-7.5
P2: X40 Z-15
P3: X40 Z-25
P4: X60 Z-35

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Incremental dimensions With incremental dimensions (also referred to as sequential

(INC) dimensions) a position specification refers to the previously
programmed point, i.e. the input value corresponds to the path to be
traversed. As a rule, the plus/minus sign does not matter when
entering the incremental value. ShopTurn only evaluates the amount
of the increment. For some parameters, the plus/minus sign specifies
the traversing direction. These exceptions are identified in the
parameter table of the individual functions.
P4
10
P3 P2
7.5
P1
Z
10 10 7.5 7.5
Incremental dimensions
The position specifications for points P1 to P4 in incremental
dimensions are as follows:
P1: X25 Z-7.5 (relative to the zero-point)
P2: X15 Z-7.5 (relative to P1)
P3: Z-10 (relative to P2)
P4: X20 Z-10 (relative to P3)

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.4 Polar coordinates
You can specify positions using right-angled coordinates or polar

coordinates.
If a point in a workpiece drawing is defined by a value for each
coordinate axis, you can easily input the position into the parameter
screen form using right-angled coordinates. For workpieces that are
dimensioned with arcs or angular data, it is often easier if you input
the positions using polar coordinates.
You can only program polar coordinates for the functions "Straight
circle" and "Contour milling."
The point from which dimensioning starts in polar coordinates is called
the "pole".
P3
P2
P1
30
30°
30°
30°
Pole
30
Z
30
Polar coordinates
The position specifications for the pole and points P1 to P3 in polar
coordinates are:
Pole: X30 Z30 (relative to the zero-point)
P1: L30 α30° (relative to the pole)

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.5 Pocket calculator
You can use the pocket calculator to quickly calculate parameter

values during programming. If, for example, the diameter of a
workpiece is only dimensioned indirectly in the workpiece drawing, i.e.
the diameter must be derived from the sum of several other dimension
specifications, you can calculate the diameter directly in the input field
of this parameter.
The calculation of a parameter value is always done in the input field

of the parameter. In doing this, you can perform as many calculations
as you wish using the following kinds of calculations.
• Operators
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
() Parentheses
MOD Modulo Operation
AND AND operator
OR OR operator
NOT NOT operator
• Constants
PI 3.14159265358979323846
TRUE 1
FALSE 0
• Functions
SIN(x) Sine of x, (x in degrees)
COS(x) Cosine of x, (x in degrees)
TAN(x) Tangent of x, (x in degrees)
ATAN2(x,y) Inverse tangent of x/y, (x and y in degrees)
SQRT(x) Square root of x
ABS(x) Absolute value of x
You can input a maximum of 256 characters in a field.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.
Press the "Insert" or “=” key.

=
or The calculator is active.
Input the arithmetic statement.

You can use arithmetic symbols, numbers, and commas.
Press the "Input" or “=” key.

=
or The new value is calculated and displayed in the input field. The
calculator is switched off.
If you would first like to delete an old value in an input field, press the
"Backspace" key.
Example: Tool wear +0.1 Position the cursor on the input field "∆LengthX" in the tool wear
list.
Input the calculating instructions: + 0.1
Example: Calculating the

diameter
30
∅120
∅50
∅A
40
160
Workpiece drawing

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Position the cursor on the input field “X” in a parameter screen

form.
Input the calculating instructions: 30 * 2 + 50
4.2.6 Adjustments
If you would like to finish your workpiece to an exact fit, you can input
the master dimension directly into the parameter screen form during
programming.
Specify the master dimension as follows:
F<Diameter/Length> <Tolerance class> <Tolerance quality>
For this, "F" identifies that a master dimension follows.
Example: F20h7
Possible tolerance classes:

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, T, U, V, X, Y, Z
Upper case letter: Drill-holes
Lowercase letters: Shafts
Possible tolerance qualities:

1 to 18, if they are not restricted by DIN standard 7150.
Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.
Input the fit.
The control system automatically calculates the mean value from the
upper and lower limit value.
If you would like to input a lowercase letter, highlight the input

uppercase letter with the cursor and press the "Select" key. If you
press the key again, the uppercase letter reappears.

4 4
4.3 Sequence program

For sequence programs that you create directly at the machine, you
require a software option.
4.3.1 Overview
When creating a sequence program, always proceed according to the

following diagram:
• Create a new program
• Assign a program name
• Fill out the program head
• Program individual machining steps
The following listed machining steps can be selected.
Tool
Æ >
Straight
>
Circle center
point >
Circle
radius >
Polar
>
Approach/
Retract >
Drilling
Æ centric >
Thread
centric >
Drilling
reaming >
Deep hole
drilling >
Thread
Tapping
> Æ
Thread
drilling
Positions
>
Repeat
position >
Stock
Æ removal >

4 4
Recess
>
Undercut
>
Thread
>
Parting
>
New
Æ contour >
Stock
removal >
St. remov.
resid. >
Grooving
>
Grooving
resid. >
Plunge-
turning >
Plunge-turn.
resid. >
Pocket
Æ >
Spigot
>
Slot
>
Multiple
edge >
Engraving
Contour New
milling > Æ contour >
Path
milling >
Predrilling
>
Pocket
milling
Pocket
resid. mat.
Spigot
milling
Spigot
resid. mat.

4 4
Set
Æ marker >
Repeat >
Sub-
routine >
Counter-
spindle >
Settings
>
Transfor- Work
mations > Æ offset >
Offset
>
Rotation
>
Scaling
>
Mirroring
>
Rotation
C axis
4.3.2 Creating a new program
For each new workpiece that you would like to finish, create an
individual program. The program contains the individual machining
steps that must be performed for finishing the workpiece.
If you create a new program, a program header and program end are
automatically defined. In the program header, you must set the
following parameters, which are active during the entire program.
WO The zero-point offset in which the zero-point of the workpiece is

saved.
You can also delete the pre-setting of the parameter if you do not
want to specify a zero-point offset.
Unit of measurement The unit of measure (millimeters or inches) in the program header is
set in relation to the position specifications in the current program. All
other specifications, such as feedrate or tool offsets, are entered in the
unit of measure that you have set for the entire machine.
Blank For the blank of the workpiece, you must define the shape (cylinder,
tube, rectangle, or N-angle) and the dimensions.
W: Blank width – only for rectangle
L: Blank length – only for rectangle
N : Number of edges – only for N-angle

4 4
L: Edge length (alternative to SW) – only for N-angle

SW: Key width (alternative to L) – only for N-angle
XA: Outside diameter (abs) – only for cylinder and tube
XI: Inside diameter (abs or inc) – only for tube
ZA: Initial dimension (abs)
ZI: End dimension (abs or inc)
ZB: Machining dimension (abs or inc)
Cylinder blank Tube blank

Retraction The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free
traversing of the axes must be possible.
For each infeed direction, you define a retraction plane that is only
traversed in that direction during positioning. The retraction planes
depend on the shape of the blank and the type of retraction (simple,
expanded, or all).
XRA: Outer retraction plane in direction X (abs. or inc.)
XRI: Inner retraction plane in direction X (abs. or inc.)
ZRA: Outer retraction plane in direction Z (abs. or inc.)
ZRI: Inner retraction plane in direction Z (inc.)
The retraction planes XRA and XRI are always placed in a circle
around the blank, even for rectangular and N-angle blanks.
Retraction tube: Simple Retraction tube: all

4 4
The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the
subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of
the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the
approach/retraction cycle").
A change to the retraction plane is already in effect during retraction

from the previous machining (see Sec. "Changing program settings").
When selecting the traversing paths, ShopTurn always takes the tool
tip into account; i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into
consideration. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes
are an appropriate distance away from the workpiece.
Tailstock If your machine has a tailstock, you can further expand the retraction
area so that collisions with the tailstock will be avoided when
traversing the axes.
Enter the retraction plane XRR of the tailstock in absolute dimensions.
Tool change point The revolver travels to the tool change point with its zero point and
then positions the required tool in the machining position. The tool
change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it is
not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the
revolver is moving.
Either you establish the current tool position as a tool change point
(teaching a tool change point) or you must input the coordinates of the
tool change point XT and ZT directly into the parameter screen form.
Teaching in the tool change point is only possible if you have selected
the machine coordinate system (MKS).
Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the
revolver and not the tool tip.
Tool change point

4 4
Safety distance The safety distance SC defines how close the tool can approach the
workpiece in rapid traverse.
You must input the safety distance incremental dimensions without a
preceding symbol.
Speed limits If you want to machine the workpiece with a constant cutting speed,
ShopTurn must increase the spindle speed once the workpiece
diameter becomes smaller. Since the speed cannot be increased at
will, you can set a speed limit for the main spindle (S1) and for the
counter-spindle (S3), depending on the shape, size, and material of
the workpiece or collet.
The machine manufacturer only sets one speed limit for the machine,
i.e. none that are dependent on the workpiece.
Press the "Program" softkey.
Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.
ShopTurn Press the "New" and "ShopTurn program" softkeys.

New
program
Enter a program name.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.
You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore
symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters
with uppercase letters.
Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.

-or- The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.
Set program header parameters

4 4
Work Select a zero-point offset or input a zero-point offset directly into

offset the input field or call up the zero-point offset list using the "Work
offset" softkey if you want to select a zero-point offset there.
Input the other parameters.
Teach TC Press the "Teach TC position" softkey if you want to set the
position current position of the tool as a tool change point.
The tool’s coordinates are adopted by the parameters XT and ZT.
The work plan is displayed.

ShopTurn has automatically defined the end of the program.
4.3.3 Creating program blocks
After a new program is created and the program header is filled out,
define the individual machining steps in program blocks that are
necessary for finishing the workpiece.
A large amount of memory is available for one program.
However, depending on the storage space required, you can only

program a limited number of blocks.
• ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

You can program a maximum of 1,000 blocks using the "Straight"
function or a maximum of 600 blocks using the "Pocket" function.
• PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)
You can program a maximum of 3,500 blocks using the "Straight"
function or a maximum of 2,100 blocks using the "Pocket"
function.
You can only create the program blocks between the program header
and the program end. The following function groups are available to
you for programming:
• Straight/Circle
• Drilling
• Turning
• Contour turning
• Milling
• Contour milling
• Transformations

4 4
Fill out an individual parameter screen form for each machining step.
Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain
the parameters.
The parameters tool, feedrate, speed, and machining are explained in
the following:
T (Tool) Each time a workpiece is machined, you must program a tool. Tools
are selected by name, and the selection is integrated in all parameter
screen forms of the machining cycles (with the exception of the
straight line/circle).
The tool length offsets become active as soon as the tool is changed.
Tool selection is modal for the straight line/circle, i.e. if the same tool
is used to perform several machining steps occur in succession, you
only have to program one tool for the first straight line/circle.
D (cutting edge) In the case of tools with several cutting edges, there is a separate set
of individual tool offset data for each edge. For these tools, you must
select or specify the number of the cutting edge that you would like to
use for machining.
Caution
Collisions may occur if you specify the wrong cutting edge number for
some tools (e.g. a flat chamfering drill with guide spigot or step drill)
and then traverse the tool. Always ensure that you enter the correct
cutting edge number.
Radius compensation ShopTurn automatically takes the tool radius compensation into
account during all machining cycles, with the exception of track milling
and straight. For track milling and straight lines, you have the option of
programming the machining with or without radius compensation. The
tool radius compensation is modal for straight lines, i.e. you have to
deselect the radius compensation if you want to traverse without
radius compensation.
Radius compensation to right of contour
Radius compensation to left of contour
Radius compensation off
Radius compensation remains as previously set

4 4
F (feedrate) The feedrate F (also referred to as the machining feedrate) specifies

the speed at which the axes move during machining of the workpiece.
The machining feedrate is entered in mm/min, mm/rev or in mm/tooth.
The feedrate for milling cycles is automatically converted when
switching from mm/min to mm/rev and vice versa.
It is only possible to enter the feedrate in mm/tooth during milling; this
ensures that each cutting edge of the milling cutter is cutting under the
best possible conditions. The feedrate per tooth corresponds to the
linear path traversed by the milling cutter when a tooth is engaged.
For milling and turning cycles, the feedrate during roughing is relative
to the milling or cutting center point. This is also applies to finishing,
with the exception of contours with inner curves. In this case, the
feedrate is relative to the contact point between the tool and the
workpiece.
The maximum feedrate is determined via machine data.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
S (spindle speed) The spindle speed S specifies the number of spindle revolutions per
minute (rpm) and is programmed along with a tool. The speed
specified relates to the main spindle (S1) or counter-spindle (S3)
during turning machining and axial drilling, and to the tool spindle (S2)
during drilling and milling machining.
The spindle starts immediately after the tool change. The spindle
stops upon reset, program end, or a tool change. The spindle's
direction of rotation is specified in the tool list for each tool.
As an alternative to the spindle speed, you can also program the

cutting speed. During the milling cycles, the spindle speed is
automatically recalculated into the cutting speed and vice versa.
V (cutting speed) The cutting speed V is a circumferential speed (m/min) and is

programmed together with a tool, as an alternative to the spindle
speed. The cutting speed is relative to the main spindle (V1) or the
counter-spindle (V3) for turning machining and axial drilling, and
corresponds to the circumferential speed of the workpiece at the point
that is currently being machined.
For drilling and milling machining, meanwhile, the cutting speed is
relative to the tool spindle (V2) and corresponds to the circumferential
speed at which the cutting edge of the tool machines the workpiece.

4 4
Machining You can choose between roughing, finishing, or complete machining

for the machining of some cycles. For certain milling cycles, finishing
edge or finishing bottom are possible.
• Roughing
One or more machinings with depth setting
• Finishing
One-time machining
• Finishing edge
Only the edge of the object is finished
• Finishing bottom
Only the bottom of the object is finished
• Complete machining
Roughing and finishing with a tool in a machining step
If you want to rough and finish using two different tools, you must call
the machining cycle twice (1st block = roughing; 2nd block = finishing).
The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for
the second time.
Position the cursor in the work plan on the line behind which a
new program block is to be inserted.
Using the softkeys, select the desired function (see following

section).
The corresponding parameter screen form is displayed.
Enter the values for the individual parameters.
Press the "Help" key if you want to see the help screen, which
explains the individual parameters.
Press the "Tools" softkey if you want to select a tool from the tool
Tools
list for parameter "T".
-and-
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.
-and-
To Press the "To program" softkey.
program
The selected tool is accepted into the parameter screen form.
The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed.
The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is
marked.

4 4
4.3.4 Changing program blocks
You can later optimize the parameters in the programmed ShopTurn

blocks or adapt them to new situations, e.g. if you want to increase the
feedrate or shift a position. In this case, you can change all the
parameters in every program block directly in the associated
parameter screen form.
The directory overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that
you want to open.
Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

-or- All the programs in this directory are displayed.
Select the program that you want to change.
Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

-or- The machining plan of the program is displayed.
Place the cursor on the desired program block in the machining

plan.
Press the "Right cursor" key.
The parameter screen for the selected program block appears.
Make the desired changes.
Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key.

-or- The changes are accepted in the program.

4 4
4.3.5 Program editor
You use the program editor when you want to change the sequence of
program blocks within a program, delete program blocks or copy
program blocks from one program to another.
The following functions are available in the program editor:

• Select
You can select several program blocks simultaneously, for
example, for cutting and pasting them subsequently.
• Copy/paste
You can copy and paste program blocks within a program or
between different programs.
• Cut
You can cut and therefore delete program blocks. However, the
program blocks remain in the buffer, so you can still paste them in
somewhere else.
• Search
You can search for a specific block number or any character string
in a program.
• Rename
You can rename a contour in the program editor, e.g. if you have
copied the contour.
• Numbering
When you insert a new or copied program block between two
existing program blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new
block number. This block number may be higher than the one in
the following block. With the "Numbering" function, you can
renumber the program blocks in ascending order.

4 4
Opening the program Select a program.

editor
Press the "Expansion" key.
The softkeys for the program editor are displayed in the vertical
softkey bar.
Selecting a program Place the cursor in the machining plan on the first or last block
block you want to select.
Mark Press the "Mark" softkey.
Use the cursor keys to select any further program blocks.
The program blocks are marked.
Copying a program block Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.
Copy Press the "Copy" softkey.
The program blocks are copied into buffer memory.
Cutting a program block Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.
Cut Press the "Cut" softkey.
The program blocks are removed from the machining plan and stored
in buffer memory.
Pasting a program block Copy or cut the desired program blocks in the machining plan.
Place the cursor on the line after which the program block(s) is
(are) to be inserted.
Insert Press the "Insert" softkey.
The program blocks are inserted in the machining plan of the program.

4 4
Search

>
Enter a block number or text.
Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the

program or the current cursor position.
ShopTurn searches throughout the program. The cursor highlights the

search hit.
Continue Press the "Continue search" softkey to continue the search, as

search necessary.
Renaming a contour Place the cursor on a contour in the machining plan.
Press the "Rename" softkey.

Rename
Enter a new name for the contour.
The name of the contour is changed and displayed in the machining

plan.
Numbering program
blocks
Renumber Press the "Renumber" softkey.
The program blocks are renumbered in ascending order.
Closing the program

editor
Press the "Back" softkey to close the program editor.

4 4
4.3.6 Specifying a quantity
If you want to finish a certain number of the same kind of workpiece,

you can input the desired quantity at the program end. When you start
the program, the program will be repeatedly executed for as many
times as you specified.
If your machine has a bar loader, you can program the reloading of
the workpiece and then the actual machining at the beginning of the
program. Finally, remove the finished workpiece and enter the desired
quantity at the program end.
In this way, workpiece finishing can take place fully automatically.
Open the "Program end" block, if you want to machine more than
one workpiece.
Enter the number of workpieces that you want to machine.
When you later start the program, the program will be repeatedly
executed for as many times as you specified.
Endless
If you want to repeat the program execution an unlimited number of
times, press the "Endless" softkey.
You can abort the program execution with "Reset."

5 5
01/2008 ShopTurn functions
ShopTurn functions
5.1 Straight or circular path movements ....................................................................... 5-151

5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane ..................................................................... 5-152
5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-154
5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-156
5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-157
5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-160
5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-162
5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-163

5.2.1 Centered drilling ...................................................................................................... 5-164
5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-166
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-167
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-169
5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-171
5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-173
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns ............................................................................ 5-175
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-176
5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-178
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-179
5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-182
5.2.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-184
5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-186
5.2.14 Including and skipping positions ............................................................................. 5-188
5.2.15 Repeating positions ................................................................................................ 5-189
5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-190

5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-193
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-196
5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................... 5-197
5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-199
5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-203
5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-204
5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-206

5.4.1 Representation of the contour................................................................................. 5-208
5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-210
5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-211
5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-216
5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-218
5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material.......................................................................... 5-222
5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-224
5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-226
5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-227
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-229

5 5
ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling ......................................................................................................................5-231

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket .................................................................................................5-232
5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................5-236
5.5.3 Rectangular spigot ..................................................................................................5-240
5.5.4 Circular spigot .........................................................................................................5-244
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ......................................................................................................5-247
5.5.6 Circumferential slot..................................................................................................5-250
5.5.7 Open slot .................................................................................................................5-253
5.5.8 Positions..................................................................................................................5-259
5.5.9 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-259
5.5.10 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-261
5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................5-268

5.6.1 Representation of the contour.................................................................................5-271
5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-273
5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-275
5.6.4 Changing a contour .................................................................................................5-282
5.6.5 Path milling..............................................................................................................5-284
5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket.....................................................................................5-289
5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing) .........................................................................5-293
5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket.................................................5-296
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ...................................................................................5-298
5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket ..................................................................................5-302
5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing) ..........................................................................5-303
5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot..................................................5-306
5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot .......................................................................................5-308
5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ...................................................................................5-311
5.7 Calling a subroutine.................................................................................................5-313
5.8 Repeating program blocks ......................................................................................5-315
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle ..........................................................................5-316
5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-322
5.11 Calling zero offsets..................................................................................................5-323
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-324
5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle ...........................................................5-326
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program..........................................................5-328
5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-330
5.15.1 Teaching a cycle .....................................................................................................5-330
5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern.....................................................................................5-331
5.15.3 Teaching a contour object.......................................................................................5-332

5 5
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

When you want to perform straight or circular path movements or
machining without defining a complete contour, you can use the
functions "Straight" or "Circle" respectively.
To program simple machining operations, proceed as follows:

• Specify the tool and the spindle speed
• Select the machining plane
• Program the machining
• Program any further machining
The following machining options are available:

• Straight
• Circle with known center point
• Circle with known radius
• Line with polar coordinates
• Circle with polar coordinates
If you want to program a line or a circle using polar coordinates, you

must define the pole first.
Caution
If you use a straight or circular path movement to move the tool into
the retraction zone specified in the program header, you must also
move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result
of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed
ShopTurn cycle.

5 5
5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane
Before you can program a line or circle, you have to select the tool,
spindle, spindle speed and machining plane.
If you program a sequence of different straight or circular path

motions, the settings for the tool, spindle, spindle speed and
machining plane remain active until you change them again.
If you change the selected machining plane subsequently, the

coordinates of the programmed path motion are adjusted
automatically to the new machining plane. The originally programmed
coordinates remain unchanged only for a straight motion (right-angled,
not polar).
¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Tool" softkeys.

Tool
>
¾ Enter a tool in parameter field "T".
-or-
¾ Press the "Tools" softkey and select a tool from the tool list.
Tools
-and-
¾ Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.
-and-
To ¾ Press the "To program" softkey.

program
The tool is copied into the "T" parameter field.
¾ Select the tool cutting edge number D if the tool has several
cutting edges.
¾ In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select main

spindle (S1), tool spindle (S2) or counterspindle (S3).
¾ Enter the spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand input field.

5 5
¾ Choose one of the machining planes (Rotate,

End face/End face C, Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C,
End face Y or Peripheral surface Y).
¾ Enter the cylinder diameter if you selected the machining plane

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C.
-or-
¾ Enter the positioning angle for the CP machining area if you

selected machining plane End face Y.
-or-
¾ Enter reference point C0 if you selected the machining plane

Peripheral surface Y.
¾ Choose whether the spindle should be clamped or released or

whether there should be no change (input field left blank).
¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed.
The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is
marked.

5 5
5.1.2 Straight line
When you want to program a straight line in Cartesian coordinates,

you can use the "Straight" function.
The tool moves across a straight line at the programmed feedrate or

at rapid traverse from its current position to the programmed end
position.
Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius
compensation. The radius compensation acts modally; therefore, you
must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to
traverse without radius compensation. If several straight line blocks
with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may
select radius compensation only in the first program block.
For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool
approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the
end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is
programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not
act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight
line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius
compensation is deactivated.
Programmed
Programmed path
path
Travel path Travel path
First straight line with radius First straight line with deactivated radius
compensation compensation
If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can
program the first straight line with radius compensation or with
deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece.
Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

5 5
¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Straight" softkeys.

Straight
>
Rapid ¾ Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid
traverse traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.
X Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) mm

Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Z Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) mm
Y Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) mm
C1 Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc) mm
C3 Target position of C axis of counterspindle (abs or inc) mm
Z3 Target position of special axis (abs or inc) mm
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed
compensation direction:
The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used

5 5
5.1.3 Circle with known center point
To program a circle or arc with a known center point in Cartesian

coordinates, use the "Circle center point" function.
The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the
programmed target position at the machining feedrate. ShopTurn
calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the basis of the entered
interpolation parameter settings I and K.
¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle center point" softkeys.

Circle center
point >
Direction of Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle
rotation end point
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

Machining plane End face/End face C:
I Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X mm
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
J Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y mm
Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
K Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z mm
Machining plane End face Y:

5 5
Machining plane Peripheral surface Y:

Machining plane Rotate:
X Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc) mm
mm/min
mm/tooth
5.1.4 Circle with known radius
To program a circle or arc with a known radius in Cartesian

coordinates, use the "Circle radius" function.
The tool traverses a circular arc with the programmed radius from its
current position to the programmed target position at the machining
feedrate. The position of the circle center point is calculated by
ShopTurn.
You can choose to traverse the arc in the clockwise or anticlockwise

direction. Depending on the direction of rotation, there are two
options for approaching the target position from the current position
via an arc of the specified radius. You can select the arc of your
choice by entering a positive or a negative sign for the radius.
Target
+ Arc angles of up to 180°: +

Start Arc angles larger than 180°: –
Arcs with different arc angles

5 5
¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle radius" softkeys.

Circle
radius >
rotation end point

X Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc) mm
R Radius of arc mm
The sign determines the type of arc traversed.
mm/min
mm/tooth

5 5
5.1.5 Polar coordinates
If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with

radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these dimensions
as polar coordinates.
Before you program a straight line or circle in polar coordinates, you

must define the pole, i.e. the reference point, of the polar coordinate
system.
¾ Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Pole" softkeys.

Polar
>
Pole >

X X position of the pole (abs or inc) mm
Y Y position of the pole (abs or inc) mm
Z Z position of the pole (abs or inc) mm
X X position of the pole (abs or inc) mm
X X position of the pole ∅ (abs) or X position of the pole (inc) mm

5 5
5.1.6 Straight polar
When you want to program a straight line in polar coordinates, you

can use the "Straight polar" function.
A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by the length L

and the angle α. The angle is based on another axis depending on the
machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also
depends on the machining plane.
Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral
Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z
The tool traverses a straight line from its current position to the
programmed end point at the machining feedrate or at rapid traverse.
The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.
Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius
compensation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you
must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to
traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line
blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you
may select radius compensation only in the first program block.
For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool
approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the
end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is
programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not
act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight
line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius
compensation is deactivated.
Programmed
Programmed path
path
Travel path
Travel path
First straight line with radius compensation First straight line with deactivated radius
compensation

5 5
If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can
program the first straight line with radius compensation or with
deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece.
Programming without coordinate data is not possible.
¾ Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Straight polar" softkeys.

Polar
>
Straight
polar >
Rapid ¾ Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid
traverse traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.
L Distance between the pole and the end point of line mm

α Polar angle (abs or inc) Degrees
The sign specifies the direction.
mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed
compensation direction:
The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used

5 5
5.1.7 Circle polar
If you want to program a circle or arc using polar coordinates, you can
use the "Circle polar" function.
A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle α. The

angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane.
The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the
machining plane.
Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral
Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z
The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the
programmed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate.
The radius is obtained from the distance between the current tool
position and the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point
positions are at the same distance from the pole.
The 1st arc in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.
¾ Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Circle polar" softkeys.

Polar
>
Circle
polar >
rotation end point

α Polar angle (abs or inc) Degrees
The sign specifies the direction.
mm/min
mm/tooth

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2 Drilling
The functions explained in this section are used when you want to
program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.
You program drilling operations in the order in which they are

performed. The following technology cycles can be used:
• Drilling centered
• Thread centered
• Centering
• Drilling
• Reaming
• Deep hole drilling
• Tapping
• Thread milling
You have to program the positions or position pattern after the

technology cycles.
All program blocks involved in the drilling operation are shown in the
process plan in square brackets.
Example: Drilling
Clamping a spindle With off-center drilling, it can be helpful to clamp the spindle to avoid
spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by
the machine manufacturer. The machine manufacturer also specifies
whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would
facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for
which the spindle should be clamped.
If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to
be clamped, the following applies:
You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping remains
activated only until the drilling operation ends. When machining in
planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand,
clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is
changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" Æ "Tool"
menu.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-163
5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.1 Centered drilling
The "Drill centered" function is used to make a drill hole in the center
of the end face.
You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal.
During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.
You can use a drill, rotary drill or milling cutter as the tool.
The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the return plane and safety clearance.
Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool retracts by the retraction value V2 and drills as far as the
next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF.
3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached
and dwell time DT has expired.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted at the
1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance calculated by the
control system.
3. The tool then drills down to the next infeed depth that can be
reduced by the factor DF and the tool retracts again for stock
removal.
If you want, for example, to drill very deep holes, you can also employ
a rotating tool spindle. First specify the required tool and tool spindle
speed under "Straight/Circle" Æ "Tool" (see Section "Select tool and
machining plane"). Then program the "Drill centered" function.

5-164 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5 5
5.2 Drilling
¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling centric" softkeys.

Drilling
centric >
Break Solid ¾ Press the "Break chips" or "Solid machin." softkey.

chips -or- machin.
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value
programmed for Z1.
Z1 Insertion depth with reference to Z0 for drill tip or drill shank. mm
(abs. or inc.)
D Maximum infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed %
DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant
DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth.
Example: DF = 80
Last infeed was 4 mm;
4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm
3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.
V1 Minimum infeed mm
Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed.
If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with
parameter V1.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.
V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) mm
Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.
DT Dwell time for release cut s
rev
XD Center offset in X direction mm
The center offset can be used for example to produce a drill hole with an exact fit. A
rotary drill (rotary drill type) or U drill (drill type) is required. A "normal" drill is not
suitable.
The maximum center offset is stored in a machine data code.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.2 Thread centered
The "Thread centered" function is used to tap a right-hand or left-hand

thread in the center of the end face.
During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.

You can alter the spindle speed via the spindle override; feedrate
override is not operative.
You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the
workpiece for stock removal.

allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.
1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as
far as the final drilling depth Z1.
2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety distance at the programmed spindle speed
SR or cut rate VR.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as
far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety distance at
spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.
3. Then the tool is inserted again as far as the 1st infeed depth at
spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed depth.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling
depth Z1 is reached.
retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.
Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as

far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or
feedrate V.
depth Z1 is reached.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for

centered tapping in a machine data code.
¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Thread centric" softkeys.

Thread
centric >

P Thread pitch mm/rev
The pitch is determined by the tool used. in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE
1 cut The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping.
Stock removal The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.
Chipbreaking The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm
Amount by which the tap is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming
The "Drilling" and "Reaming" functions are used when you want to
program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

Centering 1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate
F until it reaches the depth or diameter.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to
the safety clearance.
Drilling 1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F)
until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to
the safety clearance.
Reaming 1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F)
until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at the programmed
feedrate to the safety clearance.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling reaming" softkeys.

Drilling
reaming >
Centering ¾ Press the "Centering", "Drilling" or "Reaming" softkey.

Drilling
-or-
Reaming
-or-

FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only) mm/min
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Diameter The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter of the tool reaches the
workpiece surface. The angle of the center drill specified in the tool list is taken into
account (only for centering).
Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed
depth 1. The angle specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for drilling).
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches programmed depth 1
(only for centering and drilling).
∅ Diameter of centering (only for centering – diameter) mm
Z1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
X1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y)
DT Dwell time before retraction to release from cut s
rev

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling
The "Deep hole drilling" function is used when you want to drill deep
holes with several infeed steps on the end face or peripheral surface.
You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal.

Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted by retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking and
drills up to the next infeed depth.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
safety distance for stock removal and is then re-inserted as far as
the 1st infeed depth, reduced by a clearance distance V3.
3. Following this, drilling is then resumed up to the next infeed depth
and the tool is then retracted again.
4. Step 3 is repeated until the programmed end drilling depth Z1 has
been reached and dwell time DT has expired.
¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Deep hole drilling" softkeys.

Deep hole
drilling >

5 5
5.2 Drilling

Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed
depth 1.
Tip The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the programmed
depth 1.
Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to Z0. mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
X1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to X0. mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y)
D Maximum infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed %
DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant
DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth.
Example: DF = 80
Last infeed was 4 mm;
4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm
3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.
V1 Minimum infeed mm
Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed.
If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with
parameter V1.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.
V2=0: The tool is not retracted but is left in place for one revolution.
V3 Limit distance (for stock removal only) mm
Distance to last infeed depth that the drill approaches at rapid traverse after stock
removal.
Automatic: The clearance distance is calculated by ShopTurn.
DT Dwell time for release cut s
rev

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.5 Tapping
The "Tapping" function is used when you want to tap an internal

thread on the end face or peripheral surface.
The spindle speed can be changed with the spindle override during
tapping. The feedrate override has no effect during this process.
You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the
workpiece for stock removal.

While the spindle is stationary, the tool moves at rapid traverse to the
retraction plane and then to the safety distance.
At this point, the spindle begins to rotate and the spindle speed and
feedrate are synchronized.
The tool continues to move at rapid traverse towards the programmed
position.
1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as
far as the tapping depth X1 or Z1.
retracts to the safety distance at the programmed spindle speed
SR or cut rate VR.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V
as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety distance at
spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.
3. Then the tool enters the workpiece again at spindle speed SR and
feedrate VR to the 1st infeed depth with an anticipation point of
1 mm. The spindle speed changes to S and the feedrate to V, and
the tool then drills to the next infeed depth.
depth X1 or Z1 is reached.
Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V

as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or
feedrate V.
depth X1 or Z1 is reached.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for

tapping in a machine data element.
¾ Press the "Drilling", "Thread", and "Tapping" softkeys.

Thread
>
Tapping
T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

The pitch is determined by the tool used. in/rev
MODULE: Used with endless screws, for example, which extend into a gear wheel. Turns/"
MODULE
Filets/" : Used with pipe threads, for example.
For values entered in turns/", enter the integer in front of the decimal point in the first
parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the second
and third field.
For example, 13.5 turns/" is entered as follows:
SR Spindle speed for retraction rev/min
VR Cutting rate for retraction (alternative to SR) m/min
1 cut The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping.
Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and mm
end face Y)
X1 Tapping depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral mm
surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

5 5
5.2 Drilling
D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm

V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.
5.2.6 Thread milling
The "Thread milling" function is used when you want to mill an internal
or external thread on the end face.
For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a

value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K
parameter. You can change this value.
The default selection must be activated via a machine data element.
The entered feedrate refers to the machining. However the feedrate of

the cutter center point is displayed. That is why a smaller value is
displayed for internal threads and a larger value is displayed for
external threads than was entered.
You can mill a right-hand thread or a left-hand thread.
Internal thread 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the thread center point on
the return plane, and then to the safety clearance.
2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and
then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate
along a helical path.
3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or
counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand
or right-hand thread).
4. The tool is retracted from the workpiece along a helical path at the
programmed feedrate.
5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.
External thread 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point on the
return plane, and then to the safety clearance.
2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and
then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate
along a helical path.
3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or
counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand
or right-hand thread).
4. The tool is retracted from the thread along a helical path at the
programmed feedrate.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
¾ Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Thread drilling" softkeys.

Thread
>
Thread
drilling

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also
changes the machining direction (climb/conventional).
Z0 to Z1: Machining starts at workpiece surface Z0
(only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
Z1 to Z0: Machining starts at the thread depth
(only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
X0 to X1: Machining starts at workpiece surface X0
(only for peripheral surface Y)
X1 to X0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for peripheral surface Y)
Internal thread Internal thread
External External thread
thread
Left-hand Left-hand thread
thread
Right-hand Right-hand thread
thread
NT Number of teeth in a milling insert.
Single or multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The motions required are
executed by the cycle internally, so that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling
insert corresponds to the programmed end position when the thread end position is
reached. Depending on the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the retraction
path must be taken into account at the base of the workpiece.
Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) mm
X1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface Y) mm
∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: nominal thread diameter of M12=12mm mm
If the cutter has several teeth, the thread pitch is determined by the tool. in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE

5 5
5.2 Drilling
K Thread depth mm
DXY Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) mm
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) %
DYZ Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for peripheral surface Y) mm
U Final machining allowance (for roughing only) mm
α0 Start angle Degrees
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns
The drilling positions must be programmed after you have

programmed the drilling technologies (centering, tapping, etc.).
The following position patterns are available:

• Freely programmable positions
• Positioning on a line, matrix, or box
• Position on a full or pitch circle
You can program several position patterns in succession (up to 20

technologies and position patterns together). They are traversed in the
order in which you program them.
The programmed technologies and subsequently programmed
positions are automatically chained by the control.
Sequence of execution 1. The first tool in the program (e.g. centering tool) initially traverses
all programmed positions.
Machining of the positions always starts at the reference point.
In the case of a matrix, machining is performed first in the direction
of the 1st axis and then back and forth.
The box and hole circle are machined counterclockwise.
2. All programmed positions are then machined with the second tool
in the program.
3. This procedure is repeated until each programmed technology has
been executed at all of the programmed positions.
Tool traverse path Within a position pattern, or while approaching the next position
pattern, the tool is retracted to the safety distance and the new
position or position pattern is then approached at rapid traverse.
Including/skipping You can include or skip any positions (see chapter titled "Including
positions and skipping positions").

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions
You can use the "Freely programmable positions" function to program

any number of positions on the peripheral surface or end face.
ShopTurn approaches the individual positions in the order in which

you enter them.
In a program block, you can specify up to 8 positions. To program
other freely programmable positions, you must call the "Freely
programmable positions" function again.
¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Freely Programmable

Positions
> Positions" softkeys.
¾ Press the "Delete all" softkey if you want to delete all the
Delete all
programmed positions.

Cartesian/ Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates mm
polar (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
Cartesian/ Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or cylinder coordinates mm
cylindrical (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C)
End face/end face C and end face Y - Cartesian:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y) Degrees
X0 X coordinate for first position (abs.) mm
Y0 Y coordinate for first position (abs.) mm
X1 ... X7 X coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

Y1 ...Y7 Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

5 5
5.2 Drilling
End face/end face C and end face Y - Polar:

CP Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y) Degrees
C0 C coordinate for first position (abs.) Degrees
L0 1st position of hole with reference to Y axis (abs.) mm
C1...C7 C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Degrees

L1...L7 Distance to position (abs. or inc.) mm
Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cartesian:
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) mm
Z0 Z coordinate for first position (abs.) mm

Z1 ... Z7 Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm
Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cylindrical
C0 C coordinate for first position (abs.) Degrees
Z0 1st position of hole with reference to Z axis (abs.) mm
C1...C7 C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Degrees

Z1 ... Z7 Further positions in the Z axis (abs. or inc.) mm
Peripheral surface Y:
X0 Reference point in X direction (abs) mm
C0 Reference point Degrees
Z0 Z coordinate for first position (abs.) mm

Z1 ... Z7 Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.9 Line position pattern
The "Line position pattern" function is used to program any number of

positions that lie equidistant on a line.
¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.

Positions
>
¾ Select the “Line” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box”

parameter field.

End face/End face C:
X0 X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Degrees
Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Degrees
End face Y:
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Degrees

5 5
5.2 Drilling
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Degrees
L Position spacing mm
N Number of positions
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern
The "Matrix position pattern" function is used to program any number

of positions that lie equidistant on several parallel straight lines.
If you want to program a rhombus-shaped matrix, enter the angle αX
or αY.

Positions
>
¾ Select the “Matrix” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box”

parameter field.


5 5
5.2 Drilling

α0 Angle of rotation of matrix Degrees
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise.
αX Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Degrees
αY Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis Degrees
L1 Column spacing in X direction mm
L2 Line spacing in Y direction mm
N1 Number of columns in X direction
N2 Number of lines in Y direction
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
L1 Column spacing in Y direction mm
L2 Line spacing in Z direction mm
N1 Number of columns in Y direction
N2 Number of lines in Z direction

5 5
5.2 Drilling
End face Y:
αY Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Degrees

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.11 Box position pattern
You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced
at an equal distance along on a box. The spacing may be different on
both axes.
If you want to program a rhombus-shaped box, enter the angle αX or
αY.

Positions
>
¾ Select the “Box” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box”

parameter field.

α0 Angle of rotation of box Degrees
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise.
αX Shear angle of box relative to X axis Degrees
αY Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Degrees

5 5
5.2 Drilling

Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
L1 Column spacing in Y direction
N1 Number of columns in Y direction mm
End face Y:

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.12 Full circle position pattern
The "Full circle position pattern" function is used to program any

number of positions that lie on a circle with a defined radius.
ShopTurn calculates the distance (angle) between the individual

positions from the number of positions. This distance is always the
same.
You can choose whether the tool should approach the next position
on a straight line or circular path. The rapid traverse feedrate for
positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine date code.
If you approach the next position in a straight line in a circumferential
groove, a collision may result.
Approach next position Approach next position

on a straight line in a circle
Approach positions on a linear or circular path

5 5
5.2 Drilling
¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Positions
>
¾ Select the “Full circle” position pattern in the "Full/Pitch Circle”

parameter field.

centered Position full circle centered on the end face
off-center Position full circle off-center on the end face
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) mm
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
R Radius of full circle mm
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Degrees
End face Y:
X0 X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) mm
C0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) mm
L0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) mm
Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) mm
N Number of positions on full circle
5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern
The "Pitch circle position pattern" function is used to program any

number of positions that lie on a pitch circle with a defined radius.
You can specify whether the tool should approach the next position
along a straight line or circular path (for detailed description, see
Section "Full circle position pattern").

Positions
>
¾ Select the “Pitch Circle" position sample in the “Full/Pitch Circle”

parameter field.


5 5
5.2 Drilling


X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) mm
R Radius mm
End face Y:
centered Position full circle centered on the end face.
off-center Position full circle off-center on the end face.

X0 X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) mm
C0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) mm
L0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) mm
R Radius mm
R Radius mm
α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are Degrees
approached at this angle.
Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction.
Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.
N Number of positions on pitch circle

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.14 Including and skipping positions
You can skip any positions in the following position patterns:
• Position pattern line

• Position pattern matrix
• Position pattern box
• Full circle position pattern
• Pitch circle position pattern
The suppressed positions are skipped during machining.
Including/skipping any
positions
¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.
Positions
>
¾ Press the "Line/Matrix/Box" or "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

or
Skip pos. ¾ Press the "Skip pos." softkey.

>
The "Skip positions" window opens on top of the input form of the
position pattern.
The number of the current position is displayed along with its status
(on/off) and its coordinates (X, Y).
The current position is highlighted by a circle.
¾ Enter the number of the point you want to skip in the "Position"
field (in accordance with the machining sequence).
- OR -
Position ¾ Press the "Position +" softkey to select the next position (in the
+ machining direction).
- OR -
Position ¾ Press the "Position -" softkey to select the previous position
- (opposite direction to the machining direction).
¾ Press the "Alternat." softkey to include or skip the current position.
The skipped positions are indicated by an enabled cross in the

graphic.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
Including or skipping all

positions at once
Skip all ¾ Press the "Skip all" softkey to skip all positions.
Include all ¾ Press the "Include all" softkey to include all positions again.
5.2.15 Repeating positions
If you want to approach positions that you have already programmed

again, you can do this quickly with the function "Repeat position".
ShopTurn automatically allocates a number for each position pattern

and displays it next to the block number in the process plan.
Position pattern 001
Repeat position
pattern 001
Repeat position pattern
¾ Press the "Drilling", and "Repeat position" softkeys.

Repeat
position >
¾ Enter the number of the position pattern that you want to repeat.

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3 Turning
If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a
position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"
function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining
plane").
2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the
"Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").
3. Program the turning function.
The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining

plane.
5.3.1 Roughing cycles
The stock removal cycles are used to remove stock from corners at
external and internal contours in the longitudinal or transverse
direction.
You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing).
Roughing In roughing applications, paraxial cuts are machined to the finishing

allowance that has been programmed. If no finishing allowance has
been programmed, the workpiece is roughed down to the final
contour.
During roughing, ShopTurn reduces the programmed infeed depth D if

necessary to make cuts of an equal size. For example, if the overall
infeed depth is 10 and you have specified an infeed depth of 3, this
would result in cuts of 3, 3, 3 and 1. ShopTurn would reduce the
infeed depth to 2.5 to create 4 cuts of equal size.
The angle between the contour and the tool cutting edge determines
whether the tool rounds the contour at the end of each cut by the
infeed depth D, in order to remove residual corners, or is raised
immediately.
The angle beyond which rounding is performed is stored in a machine
data element.
If the tool does not round the corner at the end of the cut, it is raised
by the safety distance or a value specified in the machine data at rapid
traverse. ShopTurn always observes the lower value, since otherwise
stock removal at inside contours, for example, could cause the
contour to be damaged.

5 5
5.3 Turning
Finishing Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.

ShopTurn automatically selects and deselects tool radius
compensation during finishing.
Longitudinal stock removal from external Paraxial roughing

contour
Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
by the safety distance.
2. The tool moves to the first infeed depth at rapid traverse.
3. The first cut is made at machining feedrate.
4. The tool rounds the contour at machining feedrate or is raised at
rapid traverse (see "Roughing").
5. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point for the next
infeed depth.
6. The next cut is made at machining feedrate.
7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated until the final depth is reached.
Stock
¾ Press the "Turning" and "Stock removal" softkeys.
removal >
¾ Select one of the three stock removal cycles via the softkeys:
Simple stock removal cycle straight line
-or-
Stock removal cycle straight line with radii or chamfers
-or-
Stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers

5 5
5.3 Turning

Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
Position Stock removal position:
Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

parallel to
zurZZ-Achse
axis (longitudinal)
(Längs) parallel to
zurXX-Achse (Plan)
axis (plane)
Outside
Außen Inside
Innen Face
Stirnseite Rear
Rückseite
X X X X
Z Z Z Z
X X X X
Z Z Z Z

X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm
Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm
D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
FSn Chamfer (n=1 to 3) alternative to Rn mm
Rn Radius (n=1 to 3) alternative to FSn mm
Xm-Zm-α1-α2 Select which of the parameters Xm, Zm, α1 and α2 should be displayed – (only for
stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
Xm Intermediate point ∅ (abs) or intermediate point (inc) mm
Zm Intermediate point (abs or inc) mm
α1 Angle of first path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and Degrees
chamfers)
α2 Angle of second path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and Degrees
chamfers)

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.2 Recessing cycles
Recessing cycles are used when you want to machine symmetrical

and asymmetrical grooves on any straight contour element.
Inclined recess
You can machine outer or inner recesses in the longitudinal or
transverse directions.
Use the "Recess width" and "Recess depth" parameters to determine
the shape of the recess. If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is
machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80%
of the tool width for each recess.
You can specify a finishing allowance for the recess base and the
flanks; roughing is then performed down to this point.
The dwell time between recessing and retraction is stored in a
machine data element.
Approach/retraction Roughing (infeed depth D > 0)
Safety clearance
(1) D
(2)
(7) (5) (6) (8) D D + safety clearance
(3)
(4) D D + safety clearance
Machining steps in recessing

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
2. The tool cuts a recess in the center of infeed depth D (1).
3. The tool moves back by D + safety distance at rapid traverse.
4. The tool cuts a recess next to the first recess of infeed depth
2D (2).
5. The tool moves back by D + safety distance at rapid traverse.

5 5
5.3 Turning
6. The tool cuts alternately in the first and second recess by the
infeed depth 2D, until the final depth T1 is reached (3) and (4).
Between the individual recesses, the tool moves back by D +
safety distance at rapid traverse. After the last recess, the tool is
retracted at rapid traverse to the safety distance.
7. All subsequent recess cuts are made alternately and directly down
to the final depth T1 (5) to (8). Between the individual recesses, the
tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Finishing
1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
2. The tool moves at the machining feedrate down one flank and then
along the bottom to the center.
4. The tool moves at the machining feedrate down the other flank and
then along the bottom to the center.
¾ Press the "Turning" and "Recess" softkeys.

Recess
>
¾ Select one of the three recess cycles with the softkey:

Simple recessing cycle
-or-
Recessing cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers
-or-
Recessing on an incline with oblique lines, radii or chamfers

5 5
5.3 Turning

Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
+ Complete machining
Position Recess position:
Reference Reference point:

point

B1 Recess width, bottom (inc) mm
B2 Recess width, top (inc) alternative to B1 – (only for recess with oblique lines and mm
radii)
T1 Recess depth at reference point (abs or inc) mm
T2 Recess depth opposite reference point (abs or inc) alternative to T1 – mm
(only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
α0 Angle of the incline on which the recess should be machined – (only for inclined Degrees
recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
The angles can be between -180 and +180°
Longitudinal recess: α0 = 0° ⇒ Parallel to the Z axis
Transverse recess: α0 = 0° ⇒ Parallel to the X axis
A positive angle indicates rotation from the X axis to the Z axis
α1, α2 Flank angle (not for simple recess cycle) Degrees
Asymmetrical recesses can be described by separate flank angles. The angles can
be between 0 and < 90°.
FS Chamfer (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to R (not for simple recess cycle) mm
R Radius (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to FS (not for simple recess cycle) mm
D Infeed depth for 1st cut (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
D=0: 1st cut is made directly to final depth T1
D>0: The 1st and 2nd cuts are made alternately to infeed depth D
for improved chip clearance and
avoidance of tool breakage.
1 2 D
5 D T1
3
4
All further cuts are made directly to final depth T1.

The lateral infeed for the alternate cuts is determined automatically in the cycle.
Alternate cutting is not possible if the tool can only reach the recess base at one
position.
U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – mm
(alternative to UX and UZ)
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

5 5
5.3 Turning
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

N Number of recesses (N=1....65535)
P Distance between recesses (inc) mm
P is not displayed when N=1
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F
The "Undercut form E" and "Undercut form F" are used when you
want to turn undercuts to DIN509 in form E or form F.
2. The undercut is made in one cut at machining feedrate, starting
from the flank through to the cross-feed V.
3. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.
Undercut form E Undercut form F
¾ Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut
>
Undercut Undercut ¾ Press the "Undercut form E" or

form E -or- form F "Undercut form F" softkey.

5 5
5.3 Turning

Position Position of undercut form E:
Position of undercut form F:
Undercut size Undercut size according to DIN table:

Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or
F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)
X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm
X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or allowance in X direction (inc) mm
Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for undercut form F only) mm
V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm
5.3.4 Thread undercuts
The "Thread undercut DIN" or "Thread undercut" functions are used

when you want to program thread undercuts to DIN 76 for workpieces
with metric ISO threads or freely-definable thread undercuts.
2. The first cut is made at the machining feedrate, starting from the
flank and traveling along the shape of the thread undercut as far as
the safety distance.
3. The tool moves to the next starting position at rapid traverse.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the thread undercut is finished.
During finishing the tool travels as far as cross-feed V.
Thread undercut

5 5
5.3 Turning
¾ Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut
>
Undercut Undercut ¾ Press the "Undercut thread DIN" or "Undercut thread" softkey.
thread DIN -or- thread

Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
Position Position of thread undercut:
P Select the pitch from the preset DIN table or enter – (for "Thread undercut DIN" only) mm/rev
X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or mm
Allowance in X direction (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only)
Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm
R1,R2 Radius1, Radius2 (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm
α Insertion angle Degrees
V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm
D Infeed (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – mm
(alternative to UX and UZ)

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.5 Thread cutting
The "Longitudinal thread", "Conical thread" and "Face thread"

functions are used when you want to cut external or internal threads
with constant or variable pitch.
There may be single or multiple threads.

You define a right or left-hand thread by the direction of spindle
rotation and the feed direction.
The infeed is performed automatically with a constant infeed depth or

constant cutting cross-section.
• With a constant infeed depth, the cutting cross-section increases

from cut to cut. The finishing allowance is machined in one cut
after roughing.
A constant infeed depth can produce better cutting conditions at
small thread depths.
• With a constant cutting cross-section, the cutting pressure

remains constant over all roughing cuts and the infeed depth is
reduced.
For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a

value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K
parameter. You can change this value.
The default selection must be activated via a machine data element.
The cycle requires a speed-controlled spindle with a position

measuring system.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

2. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position
displaced by the thread advance W.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the starting position displaced
by the thread run-in W2.
3. The first cut is made with thread pitch P as far as the thread run-
out R.
4. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then
to the next starting position.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then
back to the starting position.
5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the thread is finished.

5 5
5.3 Turning
Thread longitudinal
Thread machining can be stopped at any time thanks to the "Quick-
raise" function. It ensures that the tool does not damage the thread
when it is raised.
¾ Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Thread
>
Thread Thread ¾ Press the "Thread long.", "Thread cone" or "Thread face" softkey.
long. -or- cone
Thread
-or- face

in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE
G Pitch change – only for P= mm/rev or inch/rev
G = 0 The thread pitch P does not change.
G > 0 The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution.
G < 0 The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution.
If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be
programmed can be calculated as follows:
|Pe2 - P2 |
2
G = ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯ [mm/rev ]
2*Z1
The identifiers have the following meanings:

Pe End pitch of thread [mm/rev]
P Start pitch of thread [mm/rev]
Z1 Thread length [mm]
A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the threads on the workpieces.

5 5
5.3 Turning
Linear: Infeed with constant cutting depth (for roughing only)

Degressive: Infeed with constant cutting cross-section (for roughing only)
Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
Internal thread Internal thread
External thread External thread
X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm
X1/Xα Thread incline ∅ (abs or inc) – (for conical thread only) mm/degr.
X1 Thread length ∅ (abs) or thread length (inc) – (for face thread only) mm
Z1 Thread length (abs or inc) – (only for longitudinal and conical threads) mm
W Thread advance (inc) mm
The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) displaced by the
thread advance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the
individual cuts slightly earlier in order to produce a precise start of thread as well.
W2 Thread run-in (inc) mm
The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side and
instead have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
W2=R Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc) mm
R Thread run-out (inc) mm
The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end of
the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
K Thread depth (inc) mm
If the value is calculated by ShopTurn, the field is displayed with a gray background.
The value can still be changed, however, in which case the field is displayed with a
white background again.
The programmed final machining allowance U is subtracted from the preset thread
depth K and the remainder is segmented into a number of roughing cuts. The cycle
automatically calculates the individual current infeed depths as a function of the
specified cut segmentation.
α Infeed slope as angle – alternative to infeed slope as flank Degrees
α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
α < 0: Infeed along the front flank
α = 0: Infeed at right angles to cutting direction
If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute value for this parameter must not
exceed half the flank angle of the tool.
I Infeed slope as flank (inc) – alternative to infeed slope as angle mm
I > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
I < 0: Infeed along the front flank
Infeed along the flank
Infeed with alternate flanks (alternative)

Instead of infeeding along one flank, you can infeed along alternate flanks to avoid
loading the same tool cutting edge at all times, and thus increase the tool life.

5 5
5.3 Turning
α > 0: Start at rear flank

α < 0: Start at front flank
AS Number of roughing cuts or first infeed (for roughing only) mm
The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of roughing
cuts and the first infeed.
U Final machining allowance (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
NN Number of non-cuts (finishing only)
To improve the surface finish the tool moves along the thread depth K a further NN
times.
V Return distance (inc) mm
Q Starting angle offset for single-start threads, i.e. angle that determines the initial cut Degrees
of the start of thread on the circumference of the turned part (-360°<Q<360°).
E.g. Q = 30.0
The initial cut of the thread is at 30°.
Multiple thread The sequence of motions for single and multiple threads is
fundamentally the same.
¾ Place the cursor on parameter field "Q".
¾ Press the "Alternat." softkey.
Instead of parameter "Q", the parameters for a multiple thread are

displayed.
L Number of threads (max. 6)

The threads are distributed evenly across the periphery of the turned part; the first
thread is always placed at 0°.
If a multiple thread is to be machined with the first thread not starting at 0°, a cycle
must be programmed for each thread and the appropriate starting angle offset must
be entered for Q.
A Thread changeover depth (inc) mm
First machine all threads in sequence to thread change depth A, then machine all
threads in sequence to depth 2A, etc., until the final depth is reached.
A=0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e. finish machining each
thread before starting the next thread.
N 1 of L threads
N ≠ 0: Only machine thread N
N = 0: Machine all threads
P Start thread P = 1 ... L only when N=0
If P > 1, the previous threads are not taken into account.

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.6 Thread re-machining
The "Thread re-machining" function is used if you want to machine a

thread again, e.g. if the tool cutting tip breaks while the thread is being
cut.
ShopTurn takes into account the angular offset of a thread that occurs
due to reclamping the workpiece.
¾ Switch the spindle off.
¾ Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
¾ Thread the thread cutting tool into the thread groove.
¾ Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Thread
>
Sync. ¾ Press the "Sync. Point" softkey when the thread cutting tool is
Point exactly in the thread groove.
¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
¾ Enter the value 0 in parameter field "Q" (starting angle offset).
¾ Move the thread cutting tool back until the reference point (X0, Z0)
can be reached without a collision.
¾ Load the program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

¾ Place the cursor on the thread cutting program block.
¾ Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Start
search run
Cycle Start
¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
The new start position is approached and re-machining of the thread
starts. The angular offset is taken into account.

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.7 Parting
The "Parting" function is used when you want to cut off dynamically
balanced parts (e.g. screws, bolts or barrels).
You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined

part.
You can machine at a constant cutting rate V or speed S up to a depth
X1, from which point the workpiece is machined at a constant speed.
As of depth X1, you can also program a reduced feedrate FR or a
reduced speed SR, in order to adapt the velocity to the smaller
diameter.
Use parameter X2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with
parting. With pipes, for example, you do not need to part until you
reach the center; parting slightly more than the wall thickness of the
pipe is sufficient.
2. The chamfer or radius, if applicable, is created at the machining
feedrate.
3. Parting down to depth X1 is performed at the machining feedrate.
4. Parting is continued down to depth X2 at reduced feedrate FR and
reduced speed SR.
If your turning machine is appropriately set up, you can extend a

workpiece drawer to accept the cut-off workpiece. Extension of the
workpiece drawer must be enabled in a machine data element.

5 5
5.3 Turning
¾ Press the "Turning" and "Parting" softkeys.

Parting
>

SV Speed limit for constant cutting rate (with V only) rev/min
FS Chamfering, alternative to R mm
R Radius alternative to FS mm
X1 Depth for feedrate reduction ∅ (abs) or depth for feedrate reduction (inc) mm
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev
SR Reduced speed rev/min
Parts gripper Yes: Extend workpiece drawer
No: Do not extend workpiece drawer
XM Depth to which the drawer must be extended (abs) mm
X2 Final depth ∅ (abs) or final depth (inc) mm

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4 Contour turning

The "Contour turning" function is used when you want to create and
cut complex contours. A contour comprises separate contour
elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements result in a
defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii, undercuts or
tangential transitions between the contour elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of

the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical
relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned
elements.
When you machine the contour, you can make allowance for a blank
contour which must be entered before the finished part contour. You
then choose one of the following machining technologies:
• Stock removal
• Grooving
• Plunge-turning
You can rough, remove residual material and finish for each of the
three technologies above.
For example, the programming procedure for stock removal is as

follows:
1. Enter unmachined-part contour

If you want to base cutting of the contour on a contour of an
unmachined part (instead of a cylinder or allowance), you have to
define the contour of the unmachined part before you define the
finished-part contour. You build up the unmachined-part contour
gradually from a series of different contour elements.
2. Enter finished-part contour
You build up the finished-part contour gradually from a series of
different contour elements.
3. Stock removal towards the contour (roughing)
The contour is machined in the longitudinal or transverse directions
or parallel to the contour.
4. Remove residual material (roughing)
During stock removal, ShopTurn automatically detects residual
material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove
this without having to machine the contour again.
5. Stock removal towards the contour (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour
is machined again.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
All machining steps involved in the contour turning operation are

shown in the process plan in square brackets.
Example: Cut a contour
If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a
position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"
function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining
plane").
2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the
"Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").
3. Program the turning function.
The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining

plane.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.1 Representation of the contour
ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process

plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed
symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.
Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent
to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were
entered.
Contour element Icon Description
Starting point Start point of contour
Straight line up Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line down Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line left Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line right Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line in any Straight line with any gradient

direction
Arc Circle
Right
Arc Circle
Left
Pole Straight diagonal or

circle in polar coordinates
Finish contour END End of contour definition
The different color of the symbols indicates their status:
Foreground Background Description

- Red Cursor on new element
Black Red Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated when
it is selected with the cursor)

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line

graphics while the contour elements are being entered.
Graphical presentation of the contour during contour turning
When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in

different line styles and colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Orange: Current contour element
• Green dashed: Alternative element
• Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to

match the complete contour.
The symmetry axis of the contour is represented as a line with dots
and dashes.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics

window.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.2 Creating a new contour
For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour.
You have the option of beginning the contour with a transition element
to the blank. You can also enter any additional commands (up to
40 characters) in G code format for the start point.
Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with
additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour
transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make
sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated
G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of
group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code
commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.
If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour,

you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected
contour elements.
In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in
the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one
contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the
same name.
New
¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" softkeys.
contour >
¾ Enter a name for the new contour.
The contour name must be unique.
The input form for the start point of the contour appears.
¾ Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour

elements").

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
X Start point in X direction ∅ (abs.) mm

Z Start point in Z direction (abs.) mm
Transition to FS: Chamfer as transition element at contour start mm
contour start R: Radius as transition element at contour start mm
FS=0 or R=0: No transition element
Location of transition element relative to contour start point
Additional Additional G code commands; see above

command
5.4.3 Creating contour elements
When you have created a new contour and specified the start point,
you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:
• Straight vertical line
• Straight horizontal line
• Diagonal line
• Circle/arc
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen

form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that
explain the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values
are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely
necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters
and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.
Contour transition As the transition element between two contour elements, you can
elements select a radius or a chamfer or, in the case of linear contour elements,
an undercut. The transition is always appended to the end of a
contour element. The contour transition is selected in the
parameterization screen form of the contour element.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an

intersection between two successive elements which can be
calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the
"Straight/Circle" contour elements.
The contour end is an exception. Although there is no interface to

another element, you can still define a radius or a chamfer as a
transition element to the blank.
Additional commands You can enter additional commands in the form of G code for each
contour element.
You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the
extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using

additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional
commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour.
Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2,
G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have
to be programmed in a separate block.
Additional functions The following additional functions are available for programming a
contour:
• Tangent to preceding element

You can program the transition to the preceding element as a
tangent.
• Dialog selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters
entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.
• Close contour
From the current position, you can close the contour with a
straight line to the starting point.
Create exact contour The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result,
transitions contour transitions such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be
machined precisely.
To prevent this you have a choice of two different programming

options (using an additional command or programming a special
feedrate for the transition element).
• Additional command
For the contour illustrated below, first program the vertical straight
line and enter the additional command "G9" (Non-modal exact
stop) for the parameter. Then program the horizontal straight line.
The corner will be machined exactly, since the feedrate at the end
of the vertical straight line is briefly zero.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Machining direction
G9
G64
Workpiece
Finishing contour edges

• Feedrate for transition element
If you have chosen a chamfer or a radius as the transition
element, enter a reduced feedrate in the "FRC" parameter. The
slower machining rate means that the transition element is turned
more accurately.
Creating a contour
element
¾ Select a contour element via softkey.
... ¾ Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the
input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to
next element, angle of lead, etc.).
The contour element is added to the contour.
¾ Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.
The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.
All If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
parameters e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Tangent to preceding When entering data for a contour element you can program the
element transition to the preceding element as a tangent.
Tangent to ¾ Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.

prec. elem.
The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential"
selection appears in the parameter input field.
Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different
contour options, one of which you have to select.
Select ¾ Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two
dialog different contour options.
The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black

line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.
Close contour A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all
contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close
the contour from the current position to the starting point.
Close ¾ Press the "Close contour" softkey.

contour
ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the
starting point.
Transition element at When you have created all contour elements, you can still define a
contour end transition element to the blank at the end of the contour before you
transfer the contour to the process plan.
¾ Place the cursor on the last contour element.
¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The associated input screen form opens.
¾ Enter a transition element.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour end .
The associated input screen form opens.
¾ Choose the position you require for the transition element.
A transition element to the blank is added at the end of the contour.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Parameter Description for contour element "straight line" Unit
X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) mm
Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
L Length of straight line mm
α1 Angle of lead with reference to the Z axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element Degrees
Tangential transition: α2=0
FB Feedrate for contour element "Straight line" mm/rev
Transition to FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element mm
next element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element mm
Undercut: Undercut (thread, DIN thread, Form E or Form F) as transition element to
the next contour element
Z1 Length 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
Z2 Length 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
R1 Radius 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
R2 Radius 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
T Depth (inc.) – (thread only) mm
P Pitch (for DIN thread only) mm/rev
α Insertion angle (for DIN thread only) Degrees
Undercut size Undercut size acc. to DIN table (for forms E and F only):
Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or
F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)
FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm
Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

command
Parameter Description for contour element "circle" Unit
Direction of
Clockwise rotation
rotation
Counterclockwise rotation
R Radius of circle mm
X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) mm
Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
I Position of circle center point in X direction ∅ (abs.) or mm
Position of circle center point in X direction (inc.)
K Position of circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
α1 Start angle with reference to Z axis Degrees

β1 End angle with reference to Z axis Degrees
β2 Angle of aperture of circle Degrees
FB Feedrate for circle contour element mm/rev
FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm
Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

command
Parameter Description for end of contour Unit
Transition to Location of transition element relative to contour end point

contour end
5.4.4 Changing a contour
You can change a previously created contour later.

Individual contour elements can be
• appended,
• modified,
• inserted or
• deleted.
If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with
the same name.
Append contour element ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.
¾ Select the required contour element via softkey.

... ¾ Enter the parameters in the input screen.
The required contour element is appended to the contour.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Modifying contour ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.

element
¾ Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to

modify.
The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the

selected element appears in the programming graphics.
¾ Enter the desired changes.
The current values for the contour element are accepted and the
change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.
Changing dialog If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two
selection different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter
your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other
parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.
¾ Open the input screen form for the contour element.
Change ¾ Press the "Change selection" softkey.

selection
The two selection options appear again.
Accept ¾ Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.

dialog
The chosen alternative is accepted.
Insert a contour element ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new
element is to be inserted.
¾ Select a new contour element via softkey.


5 5
5.4 Contour turning
The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour

elements are updated automatically according to the new contour
status.
Delete contour element ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.
Delete ¾ Press the "Delete element" softkey.

element
The selected contour element is deleted.
5.4.5 Stock removal
You can use the "Stock removal" function to machine contours in the
longitudinal or transverse direction or parallel to the contour.
Stock removal
Before you can machine the contour, you must enter the contour.
Blank For stock removal, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as
a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any
unmachined-part contour. You must define an unmachined-part
contour as a separate closed contour in advance of the finished-part
contour.
If the blank and finished-part contours do not intersect, ShopTurn

defines the boundary between blank and finished part.
If the angle between the straight line and the Z axis is greater than 1°,
the boundary is placed at the top and if the angle is less than or equal
to 1°, the boundary is placed at the side.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Contour finish X
Unmachined part
Finished part
α > 1: Finish to top
α α =45°
Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the top
X
Unmachined part
Finished part
Contour finish α ≤ 1: Finish to side
α α = − 45°
Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the side

Alternating cutting depth Instead of working with constant cutting depth D, you can use an
alternating cutting depth to vary the load on the tool edge and thus
increase the tool life.
D First cut D - 10%
D - 10% Second cut D
Alternating cutting depth
The percentage for alternating cutting depth is stored in a machine

data code.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Rounding at the contour In order to avoid residual corners during roughing, you can enable the
"Always round the contour" function. This will remove the protrusions
that are always left at the end with each cut (due to the cut geometry).
The "Do not round contour" setting accelerates machining of the
contour. However, any resulting residual corners will not be
recognized or machined. Thus, it is imperative that you check the
behavior before machining using the simulation.
When set to "automatic", rounding is always performed if the angle
between the cutting edge and the contour exceeds a certain value.
The angle is set in a machine data code.
Cut segmentation To avoid the occurrence of very thin cuts in cut segmentation due to
contour edges, you can align the cut segmentation to the contour
edges. During machining the contour is then divided by the edges into
individual sections and cut segmentation is performed separately for
each section.
Set machining area If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with
limits a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining
only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.
You can define between 1 and 4 limit lines.
Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining,
you can program a feed interruption. Parameter DI specifies the
distance after which the feed interruption should occur.
The interruption time or retraction distance is defined in machine data.
Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing). During
contour roughing, parallel cuts of maximum infeed depth are created.
Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance
programmed.
You can also specify a compensation allowance U1 for finishing

operations, which allows you to either finish several times (positive
allowance) or to shrink the contour (negative allowance).
Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining
cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed
parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the second time.
If you want to finish a contour more than once, you must program the
machining cycle a corresponding number of times.
Stock
¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" softkeys.
removal

Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
Stock removal Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.
direction
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal
For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side
Machining Machining direction:
direction ↑: From inside to outside
↓: From outside to inside
←: From end face to rear side
→: From rear side to end face
The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.
D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D mm
only)
DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D mm
only)
Do not round contour at end of cut
Always round contour at end of cut
Round contour automatically at end of cut
Equal cut segmentation
Align cut segmentation to edges
Constant cutting depth
Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX mm

and UZ)
Stock Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
allowance
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) mm
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm
BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)
XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only) mm
Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only) mm
Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
Set machining Limit machining area or not
area limits
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not
FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev
5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material
The "Residual material" function is used when you want to machine

the material that remained after stock removal along the contour.
During stock removal along the contour, ShopTurn automatically

detects any residual material and generates an updated blank
contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not
residual material. The "Residual material" function allows you to
remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.
The "Residual material" function is a software option.
St. remov.
¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "St. remov. resid." softkeys.
resid.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning

Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
Stock removal Stock removal direction: longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.
direction
For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal
For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side
Machining Machining direction:
direction ↑: From inside to outside
↓: From outside to inside
←: From end face to rear side
→: From rear side to end face
The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction.
DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D mm
only)
DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D mm
only)
Do not round contour at end of cut
Always round contour at end of cut
Round contour automatically at end of cut
Equal cut segmentation
Align cut segmentation to edges
Constant cutting depth
Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)
and UZ)
allowance
Negative value: Compens. allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance
area limits
Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not
FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.7 Grooving
The "Grooving" function is used to machine grooves of any shape.
Grooving
Before you program the groove, you must define the groove contour.
If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts.

The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each
recess.
Blank With grooving, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a
cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any blank
contour.
you can program a feed interruption.
Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal"

in each case.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving" softkeys.

Grooving

Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
Stock removal Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse
direction
For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal
For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side
XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
and UZ)
allowance
allowance
area limits
N Number of grooves

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.8 Grooving residual material
The "Grooving residual material" function is used when you want to

machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.
During grooving, ShopTurn detects automatically any residual material

and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as
part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Grooving
residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material
with a suitable tool.
The "Grooving residual material" function is a software option.
Grooving
¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving resid." softkeys.
resid.

Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
direction
and UZ)
Stock allow. Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
Negative value: Compens. allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance
area limits
N Number of grooves

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.9 Plunge-turning
The "Plunge-turning" function is used to machine grooves of any

shape.
In contrast to grooving, the plunge-turning function removes material
on the sides after the groove has been machined in order to reduce
machining time. Unlike grooving, the plunge-turning function allows
you to machine contours that the tool must enter vertically.
Plunge-turning
You will need a special tool for plunge-turning.

Before you program the "Plunge-turning" cycle, you must define the
contour.
Blank With plunge-turning, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined
as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any
unmachined-part contour.
you can program a feed interruption.
Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal"

in each case.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Plunge-
¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turning" softkeys.
turning

FX Feed in X direction mm/rev
FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev
Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
direction
and UZ)
allowance
allowance
area limits
N Number of grooves

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material
The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is used when you want

to machine the material that remained after grooving along the
contour.
During plunge-turning, ShopTurn automatically detects any residual

material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that
remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The
"Plunge-turning residual material" function allows you to remove
unwanted material with a suitable tool.
The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is a software option.
Plunge-turn.
¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turn. resid." softkeys.
resid.

FX Feed in X direction mm/rev
FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev
Machining
Roughing
protection
Finishing
direction
and UZ)
allowance

5 5
5.4 Contour turning

allowance
area limits
N Number of grooves

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5 Milling
The functions explained in this section are used when you want to mill
simple geometric shapes on the end face or peripheral surface.
The following geometric shapes are available for milling:

• Rectangular pocket
• Circular pocket
• Rectangular spigot
• Circular spigot
• Longitudinal slot
• Circumferential slot
• Open slot
• Multiple edge
• Engraving
To mill pockets, spigots or slots at one position only, enter the position
in the technology block. If you want to mill these shapes at more than
one position, however, you must program the positions or position
pattern in a separate block after the technology block.
The technology block and the positioning block are shown in the
process plan in square brackets.
Example: Milling
Clamping a spindle When milling, it can be useful, for example, during vertical insertion
into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The
"Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will
clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if
you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be
clamped.

5 5
5.5 Milling
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically
released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y
and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal,
i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or
clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" Æ "Tool" menu.
5.5.1 Rectangular pocket
The "Rectangular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any
rectangular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.
The following machining methods are available:

• Milling rectangular pocket from solid material
• Pre-drilling a rectangular pocket in the center first if, for example,
the milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the
drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after
the other).
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid
traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the
safety clearance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the method
selected.
3. The pocket is always machined from inside out using the selected
machining method.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular pocket
as follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are
machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is
reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket
edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the corner radius.
During the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except
that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Chamfer
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the
pocket.
Pocket
¾ Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" softkeys.
>
Rectangu-
lar pocket
If you want to mill a chamfer and the corner radius was R = 0 during
finishing, you must specify the radius of the finishing milling tool in
parameter R during chamfering.

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
Machining
Roughing
method
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering
Single pos. Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several rectangular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

5 5
5.5 Milling
Single position End face/End face C:

The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket.
Y0 Reference point in Y direction (abs.) mm
L0 Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) mm
C0 Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Degrees
Z0 Reference point in Z direction (abs.) mm
Z1 Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
FS Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only) mm
Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
X1 Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
DYZ Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
DX Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
Single position End face Y:

5 5
5.5 Milling
Single position Peripheral surface Y:

X0 Reference point (abs) mm
X1 Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
W Pocket width mm
L Pocket length mm
R Radius at pocket corners mm
α0 Angle of rotation of pocket Degrees
Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point
Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis
Insertion Insertion strategy
Helical: Insertion along helical path
The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed in the plane.
Oscillating: Insertion with oscillation along center axis of pocket
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.
If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth
infeed.
Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the
pocket has been predrilled.
EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.
ER Insertion radius (only for helical insertion) mm
The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain.
Also make sure the pocket is not violated.
EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees
FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion mm/tooth
only) mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral mm/tooth
surface Y with central insertion only) mm/min

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.2 Circular pocket
The "Circular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any
circular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.
The following machining variants are available:

• Milling a circular pocket from solid material
• Pre-drilling a circular pocket in the center first if, for example, the
milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the drilling,
circular pocket and position program blocks one after the other).
For milling with the “circular pocket” function two methods are
available, the plane-by-plane method and the helical method.
Plane-by-plane machining In plane-by-plane machining of the pocket, the material is removed
horizontally, one layer at a time.
safety distance.
selected.
3. The pocket is always machined from inside out using the selected
machining method.
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as
follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are
machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is
reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket
edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the pocket radius.
• Edge finishing
• Chamfer
pocket.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Helical machining In helical machining, the material is removed down to pocket depth in
a helical movement.
safety distance.
2. Infeed to the first machining diameter.
3. The pocket is machined to pocket depth using the selected
machining method.
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as
follows:
• Roughing
During roughing, the pocket is machined downward with helical
movements.
A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual
material.
The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a
quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance.
This process is repeated layer by layer, from inside out, until the
pocket has been completely machined.
• Finishing
During finishing, the edge is first machined down to the base with a
helical movement.
material.
The base is milled from outside in, using a spiral movement.
The tool is retracted with rapid traverse from the center of the
pocket to a safety distance.
• Finishing the edge
During finishing the edge, the edge is first machined down to the
base with a helical movement.
material.
The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a
quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance.
Pocket
¾ Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Circular pocket" softkeys.
>
Circular
pocket

5 5
5.5 Milling

Machining
Roughing
method
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering (only plane by plane)
Plane-by- Machine pocket plane by plane
plane helical Machine pocket helically
Single pos. Mill circular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several circular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket.
DZ Plane by plane:
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
Helical:
Maximum pitch of the helix mm/rev
X1 Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
UYZ Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UX Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
FS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only) mm
ZFS Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area mm
X1 Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
∅ Diameter of pocket mm
Insertion Insertion strategy (only for “plane by plane” machining variant)
Helical: Insertion in a helical path
The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed in the plane.
Feedrate: Machining feed
Center: Vertical insertion at center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ
Note: Vertical insertion into the pocket center can be used only if the tool can cut
across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.

5 5
5.5 Milling
EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev

The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.
ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm
The radius cannot be any larger than the milling cutter radius; otherwise, material
will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.
only) mm/min
5.5.3 Rectangular spigot
The "Rectangular spigot" function is used when you want to mill

various rectangular spigots.
You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner
radius:
Rectangular spigot
In addition to the required rectangular spigot, you must also specify a

blank spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at
rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any
adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished
spigot within the blank.
The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine
the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Rectangular
spigot" function several times, with a continually decreasing finishing
allowance.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
The starting point is on the positive X axis rotated through α0.
2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at
the machining feedrate. The tool first executes the infeed at
machining depth, followed by the movement in the plane.
Depending on the machining direction that has been programmed
(up-cut/synchronism), the spigot is machined in a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool is
removed from the contour in a semicircle; the infeed to the next
machining depth is then executed.
4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and
circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the
programmed spigot depth is reached.
Tool
X
Retracting
contour Approaching
contour
Rectangular
spigot
Approaching and retracting from the rectangular spigot in a semicircle
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular spigot
as follows:
• Roughing
Roughing involves moving round the spigot until the programmed
finishing allowance has been reached.
• Finishing
If you have programmed a finishing allowance, the spigot is moved
round until depth Z1 is reached.
• Chamfer
rectangular spigot.

5 5
5.5 Milling
¾ Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Rectangular spigot" softkeys.

Spigot
>
Rectangu-
lar spigot

Machining
Roughing
method
Finishing
Chamfering
Single pos. Mill rectangular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several rectangular spigots in a position pattern (full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot.
Z1 Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in depth (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth) – (for chamfer only) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling

UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
X1 Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
W Width of finished-part spigot mm
L Length of finished-part spigot mm
R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of spigot Degrees
W1 Width of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm
L1 Length of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.4 Circular spigot
The "Circular spigot" function is used when you want to mill a circular
spigot.
In addition to the required circular spigot, you must also define a blank
spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid
traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any
adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished
spigot within the blank.
The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine
the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Circular
spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.
The starting point is always on the positive X axis.
2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at
the machining feedrate. The tool first executes the infeed at
machining depth, followed by the movement in the plane.
Depending on the machining direction that has been programmed
(up-cut/synchronism), the spigot is machined in a clockwise or
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool is
removed from the contour in a semicircle; the infeed to the next
machining depth is then executed.
4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and
circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the
programmed spigot depth is reached.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Tool
X
Retracting
contour Approaching
contour
Y
Circular
spigot
Approaching and retracting from the circular spigot in a semicircle
¾ Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Circular spigot" softkeys.

Spigot
>
Circular
spigot

Machining
Roughing
method
Finishing
Chamfering
Single pos. Mill circular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several circular spigots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot.

5 5
5.5 Milling
X1 Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
∅ Diameter of finished-part spigot mm
∅1 Diameter of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot
The "Longitudinal slot" function is used when you want to mill a

longitudinal slot on the end face or peripheral surface.
The following machining methods are available:

• Milling a longitudinal slot from solid material.
• Pre-drilling a longitudinal slot in the center first if, for example, the
milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the drilling,
rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after the
other).
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the slot at rapid traverse at
the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
selected.
3. The longitudinal slot is always machined from inside out using the
selected machining method.
Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for milling the
longitudinal slot:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are machined
one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The slot
edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the corner radius.
• Edge finishing
• Chamfer
longitudinal slot.

5 5
5.5 Milling
¾ Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Long. slot" softkeys.

Slot
>
Long. slot

Position Select position:
Machining
Roughing
method
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering
Single pos. Mill longitudinal slot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several longitudinal slots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot.
Z1 Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane mm
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for %
roughing and finishing only)
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
X1 Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
DYZ Maximum infeed in the YZ plane mm

UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
X1 Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation of slot Degrees

5 5
5.5 Milling
Insertion Insertion strategy mm

Central: Vertical insertion at center of slot
The tool executes the depth infeed vertically in the center of the slot.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center.
Oscillating: Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot:
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.
If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth
infeed.
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
only) mm/min
5.5.6 Circumferential slot
The "Circumferential slot" function is used when you want to mill one
or more circumferential slots of the same size in a full circle or pitch
circle.
Tool size Please note that there is a minimum size for the milling cutter used to
machine the circumferential slot:
• Roughing:
1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Finishing:
1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Edge finishing:
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
Annular slot To create an annular slot, you must enter the following values for the
"Number N" and "Aperture angle α1" parameters:
N=1
α1 = 360°
Approach/retraction 1. At the height of the retraction plane, the tool approaches the center
point of the semicircle at the end of the slot at rapid traverse and
adjusts to the safety distance.
2. It is then inserted into the workpiece at the machining feedrate,
allowing for the maximum Z direction infeed (for face machining),
X direction infeed (for peripheral machining), and the finishing
allowance. Depending on the machining direction (up-cut or
synchronism), the circumferential slot is machined in a clockwise or

5 5
5.5 Milling
3. When the first circumferential slot is finished, the tool moves to the
retraction plane at rapid traverse.
4. The next circumferential slot is approached along a straight line or
circular path and then machined.
The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is
specified in a machine data element.

Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circumferential slot as
follows:
• Roughing
During roughing, the individual planes of the slot are machined one
after the other from center point of the semicircle at the end of the
slot until depth Z1 is reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first until depth Z1
is reached. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant, which
joins the radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the
center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that
the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Chamfer
circumferential slot.
¾ Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Circ. slot" softkeys.

Slot
>
Circ. slot

FZ Depth infeed rate mm/tooth
mm/min
Position You can select 8 different positions:

5 5
5.5 Milling
Machining
Roughing
method
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering
Full circle Position slots around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and is calculated by
the control.
Pitch circle Position slots around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined on the basis
of angle α2.
The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle.
FS Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth for the drill tip (abs or inc) – (only for chamfer) mm
X1 Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
End face Y:

5 5
5.5 Milling
X1 Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
W Slot width mm
R Radius of circumferential slot mm
α0 Start angle Degrees
α0 is based on the end face on the X axis and the peripheral surface on the Y axis
α1 Angle of aperture of a slot Degrees
α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only) Degrees
N Number of slots
5.5.7 Open slot
Use the "Open slot" function if you want to machine open slots.
You can choose between the following machining strategies,

depending on your workpiece and machine properties.
• Vortex milling
• Plunge cutting
Vortex milling Particularly where hardened materials are concerned, this process is
used for roughing and contour preparation with coated VHM milling
cutters. Vortex milling is the preferred technique for HSC roughing, as
it ensures that the tool is never completely inserted. This means that
the level of overlap set is adhered to exactly.
Supplementary • Roughing
conditions for vortex 1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter
milling diameter
• Finishing
1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Edge finishing
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Slot width
At least 1.15 x milling cutter diameter + finishing allowance
Maximum 2 x milling cutter diameter + 2 x finishing allowance

5 5
5.5 Milling
• Radial infeed
At least 0.02 x milling cutter diameter
Maximum 0.25 x milling cutter diameter
• Maximum infeed depth ≤ section height of milling cutter
Please note that the section height of the milling cutter cannot be
tested.
The maximum radial infeed depends on the milling cutter.
For hard materials, use a smaller infeed.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point in front of the slot at rapid
traverse and remains at the safety distance.
2. The tool adjusts to the cutting depth.
3. The open slot is always machined along its entire length, using the
Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for machining
open slots:
• Roughing
To perform roughing, the milling cutter executes circular
movements. While in motion, the milling cutter is continuously fed
more and more in the plane. If the milling cutter has traveled
through the entire slot, it returns to its starting point, while
continuing to move in a circular fashion. By doing this, it removes
the next layer (infeed depth) in the Z direction. This process is
repeated until the set slot depth plus the finishing allowance has
been achieved.
• Finishing
When finishing walls, the milling cutter travels along the slot walls.
In order to do this, it is once again fed in the Z direction, unit by
unit. During this process, the milling cutter travels along the safety
distance beyond the beginning and end of the slot, so that it can
guarantee an even slot wall surface across the entire length of the
slot.
• Edge finishing
• Base finishing
When finishing the base, the milling cutter executes one motion
across the finished slot and back again.
• Rough finishing
If there is too much residual material on the slot walls, unwanted
corners are removed to the finishing dimension level.
• Chamfering
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the slot.
Plunge cutting Plunge cutting is the preferred method of machining pockets and slots
for "unstable" machines and workpiece geometries.

5 5
5.5 Milling
This method generally only exerts forces along the tool axis, i.e.
perpendicular to the surface of the pocket/slot to be machined (with
XY plane in Z direction).
For this reason, the tool is subject to virtually no deformation. Thanks
to the axial loading of the tool, there is hardly any danger of vibrations
affecting unstable work pieces.
The depth of cut can be increased considerably. The plunge cutter, as
it is known, ensures a longer service life due to fewer vibrations
occurring with longer collar lengths.
Supplementary • Maximum radial infeed

conditions for plunge The maximum infeed is dependent on the width of the milling
cutting cutter’s cutting edge.
• Increment
The lateral increment is calculated on the basis of the required slot
width, milling cutter diameter, and finishing allowance.
• Returning
Returning involves the milling cutter being retracted at a 45° angle
following insertion, if the wrap angle is less than 180°. Otherwise,
retraction is vertical, as is the case with drilling.
• Retraction
Retraction is performed perpendicular to the wrapped surface.
• Safety distance
The milling cutter motion travels beyond the end of the workpiece,
along the length of the safety distance, to prevent rounding of the
slot walls at the ends.
Please note that the milling cutter’s cutting edge cannot be checked
for the maximum radial infeed.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves at rapid traverse to the start point in front of the
slot and stops at the safety distance.
2. The open slot is always machined along its entire length, using the
Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for machining
open slots:
• Roughing
Roughing of the slot takes place sequentially along the length of
the slot, with the milling cutter performing vertical insertions at the
machining feedrate. The milling cutter is then retracted and
repositioned at the next insertion point.
The milling cutter moves along the length of the groove, at half the
infeed rate, and inserts alternately at the left-hand and right-hand
wall. The first insertion takes place at the groove edge, with the
milling cutter inserted at half the infeed, less the safety clearance

5 5
5.5 Milling
If the safety distance is greater than the infeed, this will take place
on the outside. For this cycle, the maximum width of the slot must
be less than double the width of the milling cutter, plus the
finishing allowance.
Following each insertion, the milling cutter is lifted by the height of
the safety clearance at the machining feedrate. As far as possible,
this occurs during what is known as the retraction process, i.e. if
the milling cutter's wrap angle is less than 180°, it is lifted at a 45°
angle from the base in the opposite direction to the bisector of the
wrap area.
The milling cutter then travels rapidly along the material.
• Finishing
When finishing walls, the milling cutter travels along the slot walls.
In order to do this, it is once again fed in the Z direction, unit by
unit. During this process, the milling cutter travels along the safety
distance beyond the beginning and end of the slot, so that it can
guarantee an even slot wall surface across the entire length of the
slot.
• Edge finishing
• Base finishing
When finishing the base, the milling cutter executes one motion
across the finished slot and back again.
• Rough finishing
If there is too much residual material on the slot walls, unwanted
corners are removed to the finishing dimension level.
• Chamfering
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the slot.
¾ Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Open slot" softkeys.

Slot
>
Open slot

• Face/Face C
• Peripheral/Peripheral C
• End face Y (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)

5 5
5.5 Milling
Machining
method Roughing
Finishing
Rough-finishing
Edge finishing
Base finishing
Chamfering
Machining Vortex milling:
strategy The milling cutter performs circular motions along the length of the slot and back
again.
Plunge cutting:
Sequential vertical insertions with drilling motions along the length of the tool axis.
Milling Down – for vortex milling
direction Up – for vortex milling
Up + down (alternately) – for vortex milling (roughing only)
Single position Machine slot the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Machine several slots in a position pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the slot.
Z1 Depth of slot in relation to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering mm
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – for %
roughing only
DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base mm
finishing or chamfering
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or mm
chamfering
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, edge finishing or mm
chamfering
FS Chamfer width (inc) – for chamfering only mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only
X1 Depth of slot in relation to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering mm
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – for %
roughing only
DX Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or mm
chamfering
UX Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or mm
chamfering

5 5
5.5 Milling

XFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only mm
Z1 Depth of slot in relation to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering mm
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to %
milling cutter diameter (mm) – not for roughing
DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or mm
chamfering
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or mm
chamfering
FS Chamfer width (inc) – not for chamfering mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – not for chamfering mm
X1 Depth of slot in relation to X0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering mm
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to %
milling cutter diameter (mm) – for roughing only
DX Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or mm
chamfering
UX Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or mm
chamfering
XFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only mm
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation of slot Degrees

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.8 Positions
If you want to mill a pocket, spigot or longitudinal slot at more than one
position, you must program a separate positioning block.
You must set "Pos. Pattern" for the milling cycle if you want to mill at
more than one position.
Position pattern
You will find further information about freely definable positions or

position patterns in the Section "Drilling".
¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

Positions
>
¾ Select the required position pattern via softkey.

...
¾ Then proceed as described in the Section "Drilling".
5.5.9 Multiple edge
The "Multiple edge" function is used when you want to mill a multiple
edge with any number of edges on the end face.
You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner
radius or chamfer:
Multiple edge
2. The tool traverses the multiple edge in a quadrant at machining
feed. The tool first executes the infeed at machining depth,
followed by the movement in the plane. The multiple edge is
machined as a function of the programmed machining direction
(climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

5 5
5.5 Milling
3. When the first plane has been machined, the tool retracts from the
contour in the plane in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next
machining depth.
4. The multiple edge is traversed again in a quadrant. It repeats the
process until the depth of the multiple edge has been reached.
A multiple edge with more than two edges is circumnavigated

helically; with a single or double edge, each edge is machined
separately.
Tool
X
Retracting
contour
Approaching
contour
Y
Multiple
edge
Approaching and retraction from the multiple edge in a quadrant
¾ Press the "Milling", and "Multiple edge" softkeys.

Multiple
edge >


5 5
5.5 Milling
Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y only)

Machining
Roughing
method
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering
∅ Diameter of blank part mm
N Number of edges (1, 2,.....)
SW Across the flats (alternative to L) – (for N = 1 or N = integer only) mm
L Edge length (alternative to SW) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of first edge with reference to X axis Degrees
α0 > 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CCW direction.
α0 < 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CW direction.
FS1 Chamfer in XY plane (alternative to R1) – (3 edges or more)
R1 Rounding in XY plane (alternative to FS1) – (3 edges or more) mm
Z1 End point Z1 (abs or inc) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)
UZ Finishing allowance in depth – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
5.5.10 Engraving
The "Engraving" function is used when you want to mill a text along a
line or arc.
You can enter the text directly in the text field as "fixed text" or assign
it via a variable as "variable text".
ShopTurn uses a proportional font for engraving, i.e. the width of the
individual characters varies.
2. The tool traverses at infeed FZ or FX to machining depth Z1 and
X1 and mills the character.
3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse and
moves along a straight line to the next character.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the entire text has been milled.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Variable texts There are various ways of defining variable text:

• Date and time
You can engrave workpieces with the production date and current
time of day, for example. The values for date and time are read
from the NCK.
• Workpiece count
Using the workpiece variables you can assign a consecutive
number to the workpieces. You can define the format (number of
digits, leading zeroes). The “workpiece count” variable is defined
as a user variable (_E_PART[0]) in the GUD 7 data block.
The place holder (#) is used to format the number of digits at
which the workpiece counts output will begin.
If you output the workpiece count 1 for the first workpiece, you can
specify an additive value (e.g. <#,_E_PART[0] + 100>). The
workpiece count output is then incremented by this value (e.g. 101,
102, 103,...).
• Numbers
When outputting number (e.g. measurement results), you can
select the output format (digits either side of the point) of the
number to be engraved.
• Text
Instead of entering a fixed text in the engraving text field, you can
specify the text to be engraved via a text variable (e.g.
VARTEXT=“ABC123“).
Mirror writing Programming engraving in the "End face rear" or "Peripheral surface
inner" machining planes produces mirrored text. To obtain normal text
here, you must first program mirroring (see "Defining the coordinate
transformations") and then the "Engraving" function.
At the counterspindle (where mirroring in Z is essentially active), it
behaves in the opposite manner. In this case, you need to program
additional mirroring for “Front end face” or “External peripheral
surface” in order to obtain normal text. When machining a front face,
mirroring is typically in X or Y, whereas it is typically in Y or Z when
machining a peripheral surface.
Please note that before mirroring you are in the machining plane in
which you want to engrave. (To change the machining plane, see
"Selecting the tool and the machining plane".)
To engrave mirrored text in the "End face front" and "Peripheral
surface outer" or “End face rear" and “Peripheral surface inner”
machining planes on the counterspindle, first program mirroring and
then enter the normal text in the "Engraving" function.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Full circle To distribute the characters evenly around a full circle, there is no
need to calculate the arc angle α2 between the first and the last
character; instead simply enter α2=360°. ShopTurn then distributes
the characters evenly around the full circle.
¾ Press the "Milling" and "Engraving" softkeys.

Engraving
Lowercase letters
¾ Press the "Lowercase" softkey to enter lowercase letters.
Lowercase
Press it again to enter uppercase letters.
Special characters
Special ¾ Press the "Special characters" softkey if you need a character that
characters does not appear on the input keys.
The "Special characters" window appears.
¾ Place the cursor on the character you require.
The desired character will be inserted in the text.
The “Special characters” softkey is not available in all languages.
Entering a date
¾ Press the "Variable" and "Date" softkeys if you want to engrave
Variable > Date
the current date.
The data is inserted in the European date format

(<DD>.<MM>.<YYYY>).
To obtain a different date format, you must adapt the format specified
in the text field. For example, to engrave the date in the American date
format (month/day/year => 8/16/04), change the format to
<M>/<D>/<YY> .
Entering a time
¾ Press the "Variable" and "Time" softkeys if you want to engrave
Variable > Time
the current time.
The time is inserted in the European format (<TIME24>).
To have the time in the American format, change the format to

<TIME12>.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Example:
Text entry: Time: <TIME24> Execution: Time: 16.35
Time: <TIME12> Time: 04.35 PM
Entering workpiece
counts
Workpc. ct. ¾ Press the "Variable" and "Workpc. ct. 000123" softkeys to engrave
Variable >
000123 a workpiece count with a fixed number of digits and leading
zeroes.
The format text <######,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to

the engraving field with the softkey bar.
¾ Define the number of digits by adjusting the number of place
holders (#) in the engraving field.
If the specified number of digits (e.g. ## ) is not enough to display the

workpiece count, ShopTurn will increase the number digits
automatically.
- OR -
Workpiece ¾ Press the "Variable" and "Workpiece ct. 123" softkeys if you want
Variable >
ct.123 to engrave a workpiece count without lead zeroes.
The format text <#,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to the

engraving field with the softkey bar.
If the specified number of digits is not enough to display the workpiece
count (e.g. 123), ShopTurn will increase the number digits
automatically.
You can enter an additive value, for example, if you want to resume
production of workpieces after an interruption. The workpiece count
output is then increased by this value.
Entering a variable
number
Number ¾ Press the "Variable" and "Number 123.456" softkeys if you want to
Variable >
123.456 engrave a any number in a certain format.
The format text <#.###,_VAR_NUM> is inserted and you return to the

¾ The placeholders #.### define the digit format in which the

number defined in VARNUM will be engraved.
For example, if you have stored 12.35 in VARNUM, you can format
the variable as follows.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Entry Edition Description

<#,_VAR_NUM> 12 Integer digits not formatted,
no fractional digits
<####,_VAR_NUM> 0012 4 integer digits, leading
zeroes, no fractional digits
<#,_VAR_NUM> 12 4 integer digits, leading
zeroes, no fractional digits
<#.,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer and fractional digits
not formatted.
<#.#,_VAR_NUM> 12.4 Integer digits not formatted,
1 fractional digit (rounded)
<#.##,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer digits not formatted,
2 fractional digits (rounded)
<#.####,_VAR_NUM> 12.3500 Integer digits not formatted,
4 fractional digits (rounded)
If there is insufficient space in front of the decimal point to display the

number entered, it is automatically extended. If the specified number
of digits is larger than the number to be engraved, the output format is
automatically filled with the appropriate number of leading and trailing
zeroes.
Instead of the decimal point you can also use a blank.
Instead of VARNUM you can use any other numeric variable (e.g. R0).
Entering a variable text
Variable ¾ Press the "Variable" and "Variable text" softkeys if you want to
Variable >
text take the text to be engraved (up to 200 characters) from a
variable.
The format text <Text, VARTEXT> is inserted and you return to the
You can use any other text variable instead of VARTEXT.
Deleting text
¾ Press the "Delete text" softkey to remove the entire text.
Delete text

5 5
5.5 Milling
The format text for the variables is always inserted at the current
cursor position.
The "Lowercase", "Special characters", "Variable", and "Delete text"

softkeys only appear when you place the cursor in the input field for
engraving text.
T, D, F, S, V See Sec. "Creating program blocks".

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y and Peripheral surface Y only)
Alignment
Align text to line
Align text to arc
Align text to arc
Reference Position of reference point within text
point
Engraving text maximum 91 characters
Z1 Machining depth (inc.) mm
FZ Depth infeed rate mm/min
mm/tooth
W Character height mm
DX1 Character spacing mm
DX2 Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α1 Text direction (for linear alignment only) Degrees
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.
C0 Reference point (alternative to Y0) – (for linear alignment only) mm
R Reference point on longitud. polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignm. only) mm
α0 Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignm. only) Degrees
X1 Machining depth (inc.) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
FX Depth infeed rate mm/min

mm/tooth
DY1 Character spacing mm
DY2 Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
YM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm
CM Center point of arc (abs.) – (alternative to YM) Degrees
ZM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm
End face Y:
CP Positioning angle for machining area
Z1 Machining depth (inc.) mm
FZ Depth infeed rate mm/min
mm/tooth
DX1 Character spacing mm
DX2 Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.
C0 Reference point mm
R Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignment mm
only)
α0 Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment Degrees
only)
X1 Machining depth (inc.) mm
FX Depth infeed rate mm/min
mm/tooth
DY1 Character spacing mm
DY2 Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
YM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm
ZM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6 Contour milling

The "Contour milling" function is used when you want to mill simple
and complex contours. You can define open contours or closed
contours (pockets, islands, spigots) and machine them with path
milling or milling cycles.
A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two

and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also
program chamfers, radii or tangential transitions between the contour
elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of

the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical
relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned
elements.
With contour milling, you must always program the geometry of the
contour before you program the technology.
You have the option of machining contours of any type by path milling,
stock removal from pockets with or without islands, or clearing spigots.
Freely-definable The machining of freely-definable open or closed contours is generally

contours programmed as follows:
1. Enter contour
You build up the contour gradually from a series of different
contour elements.
2. Path milling (roughing)
The contour is machined taking into account various approach and
retract strategies.
3. Path milling (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour
is machined again.
4. Path milling (chamfer)
If you have planned edge breaking, chamfer the workpiece with a
special tool.
Contours for pockets or Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the start point and
islands end point of the contour are identical. You can also mill pockets that
contain one or more islands. The islands can also be located partially
outside the pocket or overlap each other. ShopTurn interprets the first
contour specified as a pocket contour and all others as islands.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
The machining of contour pockets with islands is generally

programmed as follows:
1. Enter contour for the pocket

You build up the contour pocket gradually from a series of different
contour elements.
2. Enter contour for the island
You enter the contour for the island after the contour for the
pocket.
3. Centering predrilling of the contour pocket
If you want to predrill the contour pocket, you can center the drill
hole first to prevent the drill slipping.
4. Predrill contour pocket
If you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a
milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you can predrill the
pocket.
5. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (roughing)
The stock is removed from the contour pocket complete with island
taking into account various insertion strategies.
During stock removal from the pocket, ShopTurn automatically
detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will
allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete
pocket again.
7. Finish contour pocket with island (finish edge/base)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for the edge/base when
you programmed roughing, the pocket edge/base will be machined
again.
All machining steps involved in the contour milling operation are

shown in the machining plan in square brackets.
Example: Removing stock from a contour pocket

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Contours for spigots Contours for spigots must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point
of the contour are identical. You can define multiple spigots, which
can also overlap. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a
blank contour and all others as spigots.
The machining of contour spigots is generally programmed as follows:
1. Enter the blank contour

i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse
outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank
contour and spigot contour.
2. Enter contour for the spigot
You enter the contour for the spigot after the blank contour.
3. Clear contour spigot (roughing)
The contour spigot is cleared.
As it mills the spigot, ShopTurn automatically detects residual
material that has been left behind. A suitable tool will allow you to
remove this without having to machine the complete spigot again.
5. Finish contour spigot (edge/base finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the spigot
edge/base is machined again.
6. Chamfer contour spigot
If you have planned edge breaking, subsequently chamfer the
workpiece.
Clamping a spindle When milling contours, it can be useful, for example, during vertical
insertion into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle
distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the
machine manufacturer.
The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will
clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if
you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be
clamped.
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically
released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and
Peripheral surface Y, the clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated
until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the
"Straight circle" Æ "Tool" menu.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.1 Representation of the contour
ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process

plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed
symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.
Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent
to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were
entered.
Contour element Icon Description
Starting point Start point of contour
Straight line up Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line down Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line left Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line right Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line in any Straight line with any gradient

direction
Arc right Circle
Arc left
Circle
Finish contour END End of contour definition
The different color of the symbols indicates their status:
Foreground Background Description

- Red Cursor on new element
Black Red Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated when
it is selected with the cursor)

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line

graphics while the contour elements are being entered.
Graphical presentation of the contour during contour milling
When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in

different line styles and colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Orange: Current contour element
• Green dashed: Alternative element
• Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to

match the complete contour.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics

window.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.2 Creating a new contour
For each contour that you want to mill, you must create a new contour.
The contours are stored at the end of the program.
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour.
You can enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in
G code format for the start point.
Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with
additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour
transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make
sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G
code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of
group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code
commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.
If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour,

you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected
contour elements.
In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in
the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one
contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the
same name.
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "New contour" softkeys.

Contour
milling >
New
contour >
¾ Enter a name for the new contour.
The contour name must be unique.
The input form for the start point of the contour appears. You can
enter Cartesian or polar coordinates.
Cartesian starting point ¾ Select the machining plane.
¾ Enter the starting point for the contour.
¾ Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

elements").
Polar starting point ¾ Select the machining plane.
¾ Press the "Pole" softkey.

Pole
¾ Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.
¾ Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.
¾ Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

elements").

• Face/Face C
• Peripheral/Peripheral C
• End face Y (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)
End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian:

X Start point in X direction (abs.) mm
Y Start point in Y direction (abs.) mm
End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar:

X Pole position in X direction (abs.) mm
Y Pole position in Y direction (abs.) mm
L1 Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) mm
ϕ1 Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Degrees
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian:

∅ Cylinder surface mm
Y Start point in Y direction (abs.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) mm
Yα Starting angle (abs.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Degrees
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Polar:

∅ Cylinder surface mm
Z Pole position in Z direction (abs.) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian:

Y Start point in Y direction (abs.) mm
Peripheral surface Y - Polar:
Z Pole position in Z direction (abs.) mm
command
5.6.3 Creating contour elements
When you have created a new contour and specified the start point,
you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:
• Straight horizontal line
• Straight vertical line
• Diagonal line
• Circle/arc
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen

form. The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in
Cartesian format; however, for the contour elements Diagonal line and
Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and polar coordinates. If
you wish to enter polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If you
have already defined a pole for the start point, you can also relate the
polar coordinates to this pole. In this case there is therefore no need
to define another pole.
Parameter input Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain
the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values
are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely
necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters
and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Machining direction In the case of path milling, the contour is always machined in the
programmed direction. By programming the contour in the clockwise
direction or counterclockwise direction, you can determine whether the
contour is machined with down-cut milling or up-cut milling (see the
following table).
Outside contour
Required direction of CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
rotation for machining
Synchronism Programming in clockwise direction Programming in counterclockwise
CCW cutter radius compensation direction, CW cutter radius compensation
Up-cut Programming in counterclockwise Programming in clockwise direction
direction, CW cutter radius compensation CCW cutter radius compensation
Inside contour
Required direction of CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
rotation for machining
Synchronism Programming in counterclockwise Programming in clockwise direction
direction, CCW cutter radius CW cutter radius compensation
compensation
Up-cut Programming in clockwise direction Programming in counterclockwise
CW cutter radius compensation direction, CCW cutter radius
compensation
Contour transition As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a
elements radius or a chamfer. The transition is always appended to the end of a
contour element. The contour transition is selected in the
parameterization screen form of the contour element.
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an

intersection between two successive elements which can be
calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the
"Straight/Circle" contour elements.
That means that for a closed counter, you can also program a
transition element from the last to the first element of the contour. The
contour starting point is outside the contour after you have
programmed the transition.
Additional commands For each contour element, you can enter any additional commands in
G code format, for example, you can program a special feedrate for
the circle contour element.
You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the
extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using

additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional
commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour.
Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2,
G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have
to be programmed in a separate block.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Additional functions The following additional functions are available for programming a
contour:
• Tangent to preceding element
You can program the transition to the preceding element as a
tangent.
• Dialog selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters
entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.
• Close contour
From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight
line to the starting point.
Creating a contour
element
¾ Select a contour element via softkey.
... ¾ Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the
input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to
next element, angle of lead, etc.).
The contour element is added to the contour.
¾ Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.
The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.
All If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
parameters e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.
Defining a pole If you wish to enter the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc
in polar coordinates, you must first define a pole.
Continue ¾ Press the "Continue" and "Pole" softkeys.

Pole
¾ Enter the coordinates of the pole.
The pole is defined. You can now choose between "Cartesian" and
"Polar" in the input screen form for the Diagonal line and Circle/Arc
contour elements.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Tangent to preceding When entering data for a contour element you can program the
element transition to the preceding element as a tangent.
Tangent to ¾ Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.

prec. elem.
The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential"
selection appears in the parameter input field.
Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different
contour options, one of which you have to select.
The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black

line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.
Accept ¾ Press the "Accept dialog" softkey to accept the chosen alternative.
dialog
Close contour A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all
contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close
the contour from the current position to the starting point.
Continue Close ¾ Press the "Continue" and "Close contour" softkeys.

contour
ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the
starting point.
Parameter Description for contour element "straight line" Unit

X End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) mm
Y End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) mm
α1 Starting angle to X axis Degrees
L1 abs: distance between pole and end point mm
inc: distance between final point and end point mm
ϕ1 abs: polar angle between pole and end point Degrees
inc: polar angle between final point and end point Degrees

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

Y End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) mm
Yα End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Degrees
Z End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
α1 Starting angle to Y axis Degrees
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar:
command

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Parameter Description for contour element "circle" Unit
Direction of
Clockwise rotation
rotation
Counterclockwise rotation
R Radius of circle mm
X End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) mm
I Circle center point in X direction (abs. or inc.) mm
J Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) mm
β1 End angle to X axis Degrees
L2 abs: distance between pole and center of circle mm
inc: distance between final point and center of circle mm
ϕ2 abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle Degrees
inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle Degrees
α1 Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Angle to preceding element Degrees
β1 Tangential transition: α2=0
End angle to X axis Degrees
β2
Angle of aperture of circle Degrees
Y End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) mm
Yα End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Degrees
Jα Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Degrees

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
K Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm

β1 End angle to Y axis Degrees
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar:
L2 abs: distance between pole and center of circle mm
inc: distance between final point and center of circle mm
ϕ2 abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle Degrees
inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle Degrees
α1 Starting angle to Y axis
Tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
β1
End angle to Y axis Degrees
β2
Angle of aperture of circle Degrees
K Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
β1 End angle to Y axis Degrees
command

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.4 Changing a contour
You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour

elements can be
• appended,
• modified,
• inserted or
• deleted.
If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with
the same name.
Append contour element ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.
¾ Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.
¾ Select the required contour element via softkey.

The required contour element is appended to the contour.
Modifying contour ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.

element
¾ Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to

modify.
The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the

selected element appears in the programming graphics.
¾ Enter the desired changes.
The current values for the contour element are accepted and the
change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Changing dialog If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two
selection different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter
your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other
parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.
¾ Open the input screen form for the contour element.
Change ¾ Press the "Change selection" softkey.

selection
The two selection options appear again.
Accept ¾ Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.

dialog
The chosen alternative is accepted.
Insert a contour element ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new
element is to be inserted.
¾ Select a new contour element via softkey.

... . ¾ Enter the parameters in the input screen.
The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour

elements are updated automatically according to the new contour
status.
When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour
elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first
subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor.
The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start
point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the
error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the
problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Delete contour element ¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.
Delete ¾ Press the "Delete element" softkey.

element
The selected contour element is deleted.
5.6.5 Path milling
The "Path milling" function is used when you want to machine open or
closed contours. Before you can mill the contour, you must enter the
contour.
Machining can be performed in either direction, i.e. in the direction of
the programmed contour or in the opposite direction.
For machining in the opposite direction, contours must not consist of

more than 170 contour elements (incl. chamfers/radii).
Special aspects (except for feed values) of free G code input are
ignored during path milling in the opposite direction to the contour.
You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer)

for path milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call
the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing).
The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for
the second time.
It is also possible to choose between machining the contour with a

cutter radius offset and traversing the center path.
Cutter radius The cutter radius offset allows you to machine a programmed contour
compensation to the right or left of the contour. You can choose between different
approach and retract modes as well as between different approach
and retract strategies.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
• Approach/Retract mode
You can approach or retract from the contour in a quadrant,
semicircle or along a straight line.
In the case of a quadrant or semicircle, you have to specify the
radius of the cutter center path and for a straight line, the distance
from the outer edge of the cutter to the start point or end point of
the contour.
You can also specify different modes for approach and retraction,
for example, approach in quadrant mode and retract in semicircle
mode.
Approaching on a straight line, in a quadrant and in a semicircle
• Approach/Retract strategy
Approaching in the plane is performed first in the Z direction in the
depth and then in the XY plane. Retraction is performed in reverse
order.
In the case of three-dimensional approach/retraction, traversing is
performed simultaneously in the depth and in the plane.
You can also specify different strategies for approach and
retraction, for example, approach in the plane and retract three-
dimensionally.
Center path If you do not want to use cutter radius compensation, the programmed
contour is milled on the center path.
In this case, approaching and retraction is only possible along a
straight line or vertical. Vertical approach/retraction can be used for
closed contours, for example.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Slot side compensation When you want to mill a contour on the peripheral surface ("peripheral
surface/peripheral surface C" machining plane), you can work with or
without a slot wall offset.
• Slot wall offset Off

ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls when the tool diameter is
equal to the slot width.
If the slot width is larger than the tool diameter, the slot walls will
not be parallel.
• Slot wall offset On
ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls also when the slot width
is larger than the tool diameter.
If you want to work with a slot wall offset, you must not program the
contour of the slot, but instead the imagined center path of a bolt
inserted in the slot whereby the bolt touches both walls. The
parameter D is used to specify the slot width.
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Path milling" softkeys.

Contour
milling >
Path
milling >

C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is approached vertically for roughing)
Machining Roughing
method
Finishing
Chamfering
Machining Forward: machining is performed in the programmed contour direction
direction Backward: machining is performed in the opposite direction to the programmed
contour

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the milling cutter machines in the
compensation programmed direction:
Machining to the right of the contour
Machining to the left of the contour
Machining along the center path

Z1 Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only) mm
Slot wall offset Activate slot wall offset
D Offset to programmed path (only with activated slot wall offset) mm
X1 Depth based on Z0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm
End face Y:
CP Reference point Degrees
Z1 Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm
X1 Depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Approach Approach mode:

mode In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a straight line: Slope in space
Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)
Approach
strategy Axis by axis
Spatial (not with perpendicular approach mode)

R1 Approach radius (only for quadrant or semicircle approach mode) mm
L1 Approach distance (only for straight-line approach mode) mm
FZ Depth infeed feedrate mm/tooth
(for end face/end face C and end face Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy) mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate mm/tooth
(for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with axis-by- mm/min
axis approach strategy)
Retract mode Retract mode
In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a straight line: Slope in space
Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)
Retract
strategy Axis by axis
Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular retraction mode)

R2 Retraction radius (only for quadrant or semicircle retraction mode) mm
L2 Retraction distance (only for straight-line retraction mode) mm
Retraction If more than one depth infeed is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the
mode tool retracts between the separate infeeds (in the transition from the end of the
contour to the beginning).
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or X0+safety
clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y
only)
• Safety clearance
• No retraction

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket
When removing stock from a contour pocket, if you want the cutter to
plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end
tooth is not available, you must predrill the pocket first. To prevent the
drill slipping during drilling, you can center it first.
Before you drill the pocket, you must enter the pocket contour. If you
want to center before predrilling, you have to program the two
machining steps in separate blocks.
The number and positions of the necessary predrilled holes depend

on the specific circumstances (such as shape of contour, tool, plane
infeed, finishing allowance) and are calculated by ShopTurn.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool

changeover, predrill all the pockets first and then remove the stock. In
this case, for centering/predrilling, you also have to enter the
parameters that appear when you press the "All parameters" softkey.
These parameters must correspond to the parameters from the
previous removal step. Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Centering
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Centering
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Predrilling
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Predrilling
9. Contour pocket 1
10. Machining
11. Contour pocket 2
12. Machining
If you machine a pocket completely, i.e. center, predrill and remove

stock in immediate succession, and do not complete the additional
parameters on centering/predrilling, ShopTurn loads these parameter
values from the stock removal (roughing) machining step.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Centering
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling", "Predrilling" and "Centering"

Contour
milling > softkeys.
Predrilling Centering
>
All ¾ Press the "All Parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional
parameters parameters.
Parameter Description of centering Unit

TR Reference tool for centering
D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)
Z1 Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane mm
X1 Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane mm
End face Y:
Z1 Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
X1 Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) mm
Retraction If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
mode the tool retracts between insertion points:
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.
Predrilling
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling", "Predrilling" and "Predrilling"

Contour
milling > softkeys in this order.
Predrilling Predrilling
>
All ¾ Press the "All parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional
Parameter Description of predrilling Unit

TR Reference tool for predrilling
Z1 Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

X1 Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth mm
End face Y:
X1 Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
surface Y only)

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing)
The "Mill pocket" function is used when you want to mill a pocket on
the end face or peripheral surface.
Before you can program stock removal from the pocket, you must
enter the contour of the pocket and, if applicable, the contour of an
island.
Stock is removed from the pocket parallel to the contour from the
inside to the outside. The direction is determined by the machining
direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").
If an island is located in the pocket, ShopTurn automatically takes this
into account during stock removal.
You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for

removal. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the
machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The
programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the
second time. For further details on finishing, please read the Section
"Finishing the contour pocket".
During insertion with oscillation, the message “Ramp distance too

short” will appear if the tool on the ramp distance is removed from the
insertion point by less than the milling cutter diameter. If this occurs,
please reduce the angle of insertion.
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.

Contour
milling >
Pocket
milling
¾ Select "Roughing" machining mode.
Parameter Description for roughing Unit


5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Machining
method Roughing
DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) mm
DX Maximum depth infeed (X direction) mm
End face Y:
Starting point Determine start point automatically or enter it manually
Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line
machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening
without any insertion.
X Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start mm
point)
Y Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start mm
point)
Y Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face mm
Y with manual start point)
Z Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Insertion Insertion strategy:

Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW).
Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed
gradient (EP).
Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center.
It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).
EP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical) mm/rev
The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.
ER Insertion radius (only for helical) mm
only) mm/min
surface Y only)

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket
When you have removed stock from a pocket (with/without islands)

and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected
by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual
material without having to machine the whole pocket again, i.e.
avoiding unnecessary idle motions.
Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual
material.
The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for stock removal.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool

changeover, remove stock from all the pockets first and then remove
the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material,
you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter
that appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then
program as follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Machining
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Machining
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Solid machine residual material
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Solid machine residual material
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket resid. mat."

Contour
milling > softkeys.
Pocket
resid. mat.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

Machining
method Roughing
TR Reference tool for residual material
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
surface Y only)
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket
If you programmed stock removal from the pocket with a finishing

allowance for the base or edge of the pocket, you still have to finish
the pocket.
Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for
finishing the edge. In each case, the pocket will only be machined
once.
ShopTurn takes into account any islands as was the case for
roughing.
You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing".

Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract
strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket
2. Contour island
3. Remove stock (roughing)
4. Contour pocket
6. Contour island

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

Contour
milling >
Pocket
milling
¾ Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.
Parameter Description of finishing the base Unit

Machining Finishing the base
protection
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Starting point Determine start point automatically or enter it manually
Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line
machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening
without any insertion.
X Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start mm
point)
Y Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start mm
point)
Y Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face mm
Z Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face mm
Insertion Insertion strategy:
Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW).
Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed
gradient (EP).
Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center.
It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).
EP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical) mm/rev
The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.
ER Insertion radius (only for helical) mm
only) mm/min
surface Y only)

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Parameter Description of finishing the edge Unit

Machining Edge finishing
mode
End face Y:
surface Y only)

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket

Contour
milling >
Pocket
milling
¾ Select "Chamfer" machining mode.
If you want to mill a chamfer and have programmed inside corners

without filleting during rounding, you must specify the radius of the
finishing tool as the rounding in the contour.
Parameter Description for chamfer: Unit

Machining Chamfering
method
FS Chamfer width, inc mm
ZFS Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
End face Y:
surface Y only)
5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)
The "Mill spigot" function is used when you want to mill a spigot on the
end face or peripheral surface.
Before you mill the spigot, you must first enter a blank contour and
then one or more spigot contours. The blank contour defines the outer
limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this
area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot
contour.
You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer)

for milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the
machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The
programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the
second time. For more on finishing, see Section "Finishing the contour
spigot".
If you only program a blank contour without a second contour for a

spigot, you can face mill the blank contour.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
The start point is calculated by ShopTurn.
2. The tool first infeeds to the machining depth and then approaches
the spigot contour from the side in a quadrant at machining
feedrate.
3. The spigot is cleared in parallel with the contours from the outside
in. The direction is determined by the machining direction
(climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").
4. When the first plane of the spigot has been cleared, the tool
retracts from the contour in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next
machining depth.
5. The spigot is again approached in a quadrant and cleared in
parallel with the contours from outside in.
6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the programmed spigot depth is
reached.
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.

Contour
milling >
Spigot
milling
¾ Select "Roughing" machining mode.
Parameter Description for roughing Unit

Machining
protection Roughing

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

End face Y:
Retraction If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
mode the tool retracts between approach points.
surface Y only)
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),
Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction
mode.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot
When you have milled a contour spigot and residual material remains
in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a
suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to
machine the whole spigot again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle
motions.
Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual
material.
The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for clearing.
If you mill several spigots and want to avoid unnecessary tool

changeover, clear all the spigots first and then remove the residual
material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also
have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that
appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then program
as follows:
1. Contour blank 1
2. Contour spigot 1
3. Clear spigot 1
4. Contour blank 2
5. Contour spigot 2
6. Clear spigot 2
7. Contour blank 1
8. Contour spigot 1
9. Clear residual material spigot 1
10. Contour blank 2
11. Contour spigot 2
12. Clear residual material spigot 2
¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot resid. mat."

Contour
milling > softkeys.
Spigot
resid. mat.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

Machining
method Roughing
TR Reference tool for residual material
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
surface Y only)
mode.
5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot
If you programmed a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the

spigot in spigot milling, you still have to finish the spigot.
Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for
finishing the edge. In each case, the spigot will only be machined
once.
You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing".

Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract
strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows:
1. Contour blank
2. Contour spigot
3. Mill spigot (roughing)
4. Contour blank
6. Contour spigot

Contour
milling >
Spigot
milling
¾ Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Parameter Description of finishing the base Unit

Machining Finishing the base
protection
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
surface Y only)
mode.
Parameter Description of finishing the edge Unit

Machining Edge finishing
mode

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
End face Y:
surface Y only)
mode.
5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot
If you have planned edge breaking, mill a chamfer after that.

Contour
milling >
Spigot
milling
¾ Select "Chamfer" machining mode.
Parameter Description of finishing the edge


5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Machining Chamfering
mode
FS Chamfer width; abs mm
ZFS Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc mm
End face Y:
surface Y only)

5 5
5.7 Calling a subroutine

If you require the same machining steps in the programming of
different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a
separate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs.
Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed
once.
ShopTurn does not differentiate between main program and

subroutine. This means that you can call a "standard" sequence or G
code program as subroutine in another sequence program. In this
subroutine, you can also call another subroutine. The maximum
nesting depth is 8 subroutines.
You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control.
If you want to call a sequence program as a subroutine, the program

must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in
Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines.
The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a
separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs", and
“Subroutines" directories).
If you want to call a subroutine located on another drive, you can use
G code command "EXTCALL".
References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl
SINUMERIK 840Dsl
Please note that ShopTurn evaluates the settings from the program
header of the subroutine, excluding the blank settings, when the
subroutine is called. These settings also remain active even after the
subroutine has ended.
If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the
main program again, you can make the settings again in the main
program after calling the subroutine (see Section "Changing program
settings").
Create a ShopTurn or G code program that you would like to call

as a subroutine in another program.
Place the cursor in the machining plan of the main program on the
program block after which the subroutine call is to be inserted.

5 5
Sub-
Press the "Various" and "Subroutine" softkeys.
routine >
Enter the path of the subroutine if the desired subroutine is not

stored in the same directory as the main program.
Directory Path to enter

ShopTurn ShopTurn
Separate directory XYZ XYZ
Part programs MPF
Subprograms SPF
Enter the name of the subroutine that you want to insert.

You only need to enter the file extension (*.mpf or *.spf) if the
subroutine does not have the file extension specified for the
directory in which the subroutine is stored.
Directory Specified file extension

ShopTurn *.mpf
Separate directory XYZ *.mpf
Part programs *.mpf
Subprograms *.spf
The subroutine call is inserted in the main program.
Subroutine call
"DRILL"
Subroutine call

5 5
5.8 Repeating program blocks
5.8 Repeating program blocks

If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed
more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once.
ShopTurn allows you to repeat program blocks.
You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start
and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999
times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they
must have different names. No names used in the NCK can be used
for this.
You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but
not within chained program blocks.
It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the
preceding program blocks and as the start marker for the following
program blocks.
Start mark
End mark
Repetition
Repeating program blocks
Set
Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys.
marker >
Enter a name.
A start marker is inserted behind the current block.
Enter the program blocks that you want to repeat later.
Set
Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys.
marker >
Enter a name.
An end marker is inserted behind the current block.
Continue programming up to the point where you want to repeat

the program blocks.

5 5
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle
Press the "Various" and "Repeat" softkeys.

Repeat >
Enter the names of the start and end markers and the number of
times the blocks are to be repeated.
The marked program blocks are repeated.

If your turning machine has a counterspindle, you can machine
workpieces using turning, drilling and milling functions on the front and
rear faces without reclamping the workpiece manually.
Before machining commences on the rear face, the counterspindle
must grip the workpiece, remove it from the main spindle and move it
to the new machining position. You can program these operations with
the "Counterspindle" function.
ShopTurn offers the following five programming steps:

• Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle (with limit
stop if necessary)
• Pulling: Pulling the workpiece out of the main spindle with the
counterspindle
• Rear side: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the
new machining position
• Complete: Gripping, pulling (optionally with parting) and rear face
steps
• Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face (for bars)
If you start to execute a program containing a counterspindle

machining operation, the counterspindle is first retracted to the return
position defined in a machine data code.
Work offsets In the case of the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions, you must specify
in which work offset ShopTurn should save the shifted coordinate
system; you do not have to specify these work offsets beforehand.
In the case of the "Front face" function, however, you must specify the
work offset that you want to use.
To simplify the programming process, programming suggestions for

three typical applications are provided below:
• Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine
counterspindle
• Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece)
• Machine bars

5 5
Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine

counterspindle
The programming for this operation might look like this:
Alternative 1: Alternative 2:
1. Machine main spindle 1. Machine main spindle
2. Gripping 2. Complete (gripping, pulling
3. Pulling and rear face)
4. Rear 3. Machine counterspindle
5. Machine counterspindle
Gripping ShopTurn first synchronizes the main spindle and counterspindle. The
counterspindle then moves towards the workpiece at rapid traverse to
programmed position ZR and then continues at reduced feedrate FR
to transfer position Z1. Whether it is the front edge or stop edge of the
counterspindle that moves up to the position is defined in the
"Spindles" screen form (see "Counterspindle settings").
As an alternative, the counterspindle moves to the limit stop as of a
particular distance. This distance and the corresponding feedrate are
programmed in a machine data code.
Teach park You can enter the XP and ZP coordinates from the park position of the
pos. tool during the gripping, or accept the current tool positions with the
“Teach park pos.” softkey.
Teaching the park position is possible only if you have selected the
machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).
Teach angl. If you specify an angular offset α1 between the main spindle and the
offset
counterspindle, this will have no effect on machining on the backside
of the workpiece. You can enter the angle difference directly into the
parameter mask or accept the current angular offset using the "Teach
angl. offset" softkey.
Pulling The counterspindle pulls the workpiece out of the main spindle by
amount Z1.
ShopTurn shifts the coordinate system accordingly and saves the
offset in the selected work offset.
Rear The counterspindle moves with the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
new machining position ZW. The workpiece zero moves too and shifts
by ZV (with sign) from the front face to the rear face of the workpiece.
The coordinate system is then transposed into a mirror image for
machining on the rear face and saved in the selected work offset.
Synchronous operation of both spindles is disabled.
The counterspindle is now the master spindle.

5 5
Machine counterspindle When the rear face is machined, ShopTurn automatically transposes
the coordinate system into a mirror image, i.e. you program the
machining operation for the rear face as for the front face.
Make sure that the Y axis points to the opposite direction during
milling operations. If this is not wanted, then mirroring of the Y axis
must be programmed.
Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece)

The programming might look like this:
1. Rear face
WO: Work offset is only activated
ZV: Parameter is not calculated.
Rear Please note the following special features of the "Rear face" program
step when machining on the counterspindle without first transferring
the workpiece.
The work offset that you choose in the parameterization screen form is
only activated and not calculated. This means that the workpiece zero
for counterspindle machining should be stored in the work offset.
In addition, parameter ZV is not calculated.
Machine bars
If you use bars to produce your workpieces, you can machine several
workpieces on the front and rear face by starting the program just
once.
Machining of bars can be programmed as follows, for example:
1. Program header specifying the work offset in which the workpiece
zero is stored
2. Machine main spindle
3. Complete (pull blank: yes; parting cycle: yes)
4. Parting
6. End of program with number of workpieces to be machined
Alternatively you can program the machining of bars as follows:

1. Start marker
2. Machine main spindle
3. Complete (pull blank: yes; parting cycle: yes)
4. Parting
6. Front
7. End marker
8. Repeat from start to end marker

5 5
Complete If you program the "Complete" program step, you must enter "Pull
blank: Yes" and "Parting cycle: Yes" in the "Pulling" step. Then you
can program the "Parting" function. The workpiece is then cut off after
it has been gripped or pulled out of the main spindle.
You do not need to specify the amount by which the workpiece is
pulled out of the main spindle in this case as this is calculated from the
parting cycle parameters.
The two program blocks "Complete" and "Parting" are linked in the
machining plan.
Front As soon as machining on the rear face of a workpiece is finished,
machining on the front of the next workpiece starts. You can activate a
work offset in the meantime for machining the front face using the
"Front face" function. You will typically use the work offset that was
active before the workpiece was gripped.
The main spindle is now the master spindle again.
Teach-in park position

and angular offset
Manually rotate the counterspindle chuck to the desired position,
and move the tool to the desired position.
Counter-
Press the "Various" and "Counterspindle" softkeys.
spindle >
Select the “Gripping” or “Complete” programming step.
Select “MKS” tool under park position.
Teach park Press the “Teach park pos.” softkey.

pos.
The current tool park position will be saved.
Teach angl. Press the “Teach angl. offset" softkey.

offset
The current angular difference between the main and counter spindles
will be saved.

5 5
Function Select from five different functions:

• Gripping
• Pulling
• Rear
• Front
• Complete
Gripping:
Park position WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system
MCS: The park position is entered into the machine coordinate system; teaching
of the park position and the angular offset is possible
XP Park position of the tool in the X direction (abs) mm
ZP Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) mm
Rinse chuck Rinse counterspindle chuck or not
S Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) rev/min
Direction of Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):
rotation
No spindle rotation
α1 Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Degrees

Z1 Transfer position (abs.) mm
ZR Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc) mm
FR Reduced feedrate mm/min
Fixed stop Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the
transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate
as far as the limit stop.
No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.
Pulling:
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system displaced by Z1 must be saved.
Z1 Amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle (inc) mm
F Feedrate mm/min
Rear side:
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and
by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved.
ZnW Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system mm
ZV Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated) mm
Front face:
Work offset Work offset for machining the next front face

5 5
Complete:
Park position WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system
MCS: The park position is entered in the machine coordinate system; the teaching
of the park position and the angular offset is possible
XP Park position of tool in X direction (abs) mm
ZP Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) mm
Gripping:
Rinse chuck Rinse counterspindle chuck or not
S Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) rev/min
Direction of Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):
rotation
No spindle rotation
α1 Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Degrees

Z1 Transfer position (abs.) mm
ZR Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc) mm
FR Reduced feedrate mm/min
Fixed stop Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the
transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate
as far as the limit stop.
No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.
Pulling:
Pull blank Yes: Pull blank one blank length (preparation for next workpiece)
No: Do not pull blank
F Feedrate for pulling mm/min
Parting cycle Yes: The workpiece is parted after it has been pulled out.
No: No automatic parting.
Rear side:
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and
by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved.
ZnW Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system mm
ZV Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated) mm

5 5
5.10 Changing program settings
5.10 Changing program settings

All parameters specified in the program header with the exception of
the blank shape and the unit of measurement can be changed at any
point in the program. It is also possible to change the basic setting for
the direction of rotation of machining in the case of milling.
The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they remain active
until they are changed.
Retraction Any changed return plane takes effect starting with the safety
clearance of the last cycle, because the additional retraction from the
next cycle is completed.
Machining direction The machining direction of rotation (down-cut or up-cut) is defined as

the direction of movement of the milling tooth with respect to the
workpiece, i.e. ShopTurn evaluates this parameter in conjunction with
the direction of rotation of the spindle for milling, with the exception of
path milling.
The basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining is
programmed with a machine data code.
Down-cut Up-cut
Direction of rotation of machining for milling a pocket on the end face
Settings
Press the "Various" and "Settings" softkeys.
>
Enter the desired parameters.
For a description of the parameters, see Section "Creating a new
program".
The new settings for the program are loaded.

5 5
5.11 Calling zero offsets
5.11 Calling zero offsets

You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.
You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine
workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program.
The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new
blank.
You define the work offsets in the work offset list (see Section
"Defining work offsets"). You can also view the coordinates of the
selected offset here.
Transfor-
¾ Press the "Various", "Transformations", and "Work offset"
mations > softkeys.
Work
offset >
¾ Select one of the work offsets or the standard offset.
-or-
¾ Enter the desired offset directly in the input field.
-or-
Work ¾ Press the "Work offset" softkey.

offset
The work offset list is displayed.
-and-
¾ Select a work offset.
-and-

program
The work offset is loaded into the parameterization screen form.
To deselect the work offsets, select the standard offset or enter zero in
the field.

5 5
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate
system. Use this possibility, for example, to rotate the coordinate
system.
Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program.

You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can
select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation.
In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined
coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate
transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate
transformations.
• Offset
For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point.
New offset Additive offset
• Rotation
You can turn the X and Y axes through a specific angle. A positive
angle corresponds to counterclockwise rotation.
New rotation Additive rotation

On turning machines without a physical Y axis, problems
with the coordinate system can occur if the axis is rotated.

5 5
• C axis rotation
You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable
subsequent machining operations to be performed at a particular
position on the end face or peripheral surface.
The direction of rotation is set in a machine data code.
New C axis rotation Additive C axis rotation

• Scaling
You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as
well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then
multiplied by this factor.
New scaling Additive scaling

• Mirroring
Furthermore, you can mirror all axes.
Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.
New mirroring Additive mirroring

5 5
5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle
Transfor-
Press the "Various" and "Transformations" softkeys.
mations >
Offset Mirroring Select the coordinate transformation using the softkey.

> ... >
Select whether you want to program a new or an additive

coordinate transformation.
Enter the desired coordinates.

If you wish to reduce the approach to or return from a machining cycle
or solve a complex geometric situation on approach/return, you can
create a special cycle. In this case, ShopTurn ignores the standard
approach/return strategy provided (see Section "Machining cycle
approach and return").
You can insert the approach/return cycle between any sequence

program blocks, but not within chained blocks.
The starting point for the approach/return cycle is the safety clearance
approached after the last machining operation.
If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a
total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a
further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point.
If the tool does not need to be changed, however, you have a total of
6 positions available for the approach to the next starting position.
If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/return, you can

call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.
Caution
Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the
approach/return cycle directly to the starting point for the next
machining operation.

5 5
Approach/
Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Approach/Retract" softkeys.
Retract
F1 Feedrate for approach to first position mm/min

Alternative to rapid traverse
X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
F2 Feedrate for approach to second position mm/min
X2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
F3 Feedrate for approach to third position mm/min
X3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm
Z3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm
Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed
and change tool
Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last
position programmed
No: Do not change tool
T Tool name (not with tool change "no")
D Edge number (not with tool change "no")
F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position mm/min
X4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
F5 Feedrate for approach to fifth position mm/min
F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position mm/min

5 5
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program

You can program G code blocks in a sequence program. You can also
insert comments to explain the program.
The G code blocks in sequence programs are never checked when

sequence programs are processed.
You will find a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025 in:
References: /PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D
/PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D
You cannot insert G code blocks before the program header, after the
end of the program or within a chained sequence of program blocks.
ShopTurn does not display G code blocks in the program graphics.
If you want to stop machining of the workpiece at specific points, you

should program the G code command "M01" at these points in the
process plan (see Section "Controlling the program run").
Caution
If you use a G code command to move the tool into the retraction zone
specified in the program header, you must also move the tool out
again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing
movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.
In the machining plan of a sequence program, position the cursor

on the program block after which you want to insert a G code
block.

5 5
Enter the G code commands or comments. The comment must

always start with a semicolon (;).
The newly created G code block is marked with a "G" in front of the
block number in the machining plan.
G code block
G code in sequence program

5 5
5.15 Teaching
5.15 Teaching
The "Teach” function enables you to program and execute machining
steps while simultaneously creating a subroutine for other workpieces.
The procedure for different variants of the teaching is described in the

following:
• Teaching cycles
• Teaching position samples
• Teaching contour objects
5.15.1 Teaching a cycle
Each machining step is taught according to the following example:
Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program

You create a new program and set the program header (see
"Creating a new program").
2. Creating a machining step
You define a machining step (see “Creating program blocks”).
3. Accepting the machining step
Save the values with the “Accept” softkey. The parameter mask is
closed and the work plan is displayed.
4. Execution
Position the cursor on the program step and press the "Execute"
softkey.
A block search is automatically triggered.
5. NC Start
Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the
"Cycle Start" key.
Program the next machining step the same way if the machining
provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 5 for the
program block.
You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control

the machining results.

5 5
5.15 Teaching
5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern
You can teach any position pattern.

2. Programming technology cycles and positions/position samples
Program the desired drilling/milling cycles and the position sample
(see “Drilling", “Milling”, and “Positions and Position sample”).
3. Execution
Position the cursor on the position sample and press the "Execute"
softkey.
A block search is automatically triggered and you will receive a
query.
4. Select the work step and the position sample.
5. NC Start
"Cycle Start" key.
program block.


5 5
5.15 Teaching
5.15.3 Teaching a contour object
You have the option of teaching contour objects for rotation and
milling operations.

2. Programming contours and technology cycles
Program the desired contours and cycles and define the individual
contour elements (see "Creating a new contour", "Contour turning",
and "Contour milling").
3. Execution
Position the cursor on the desired work step and press the
"Execute" softkey.
A block search is automatically triggered.
4. NC Start
"Cycle Start" key.
program block.


6 6
01/2008 Working with manual machine
Working with manual machine
6.1 Manual Machine...................................................................................................... 6-334
6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-335
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode........................................................ 6-335

6.3.1 Traversing axes ...................................................................................................... 6-336
6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-337
6.3.3 Straight turning........................................................................................................ 6-338
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode ............................................ 6-339

6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine .................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine ................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine ................................................................................... 6-341
6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-342

6 6
Working with manual machine 01/2008
6.1 Manual Machine
6.1 Manual Machine

"Manual Machine" offers a modified comprehensive spectrum of
functions for manual mode. You can carry out all important machining
processes in “Manual” mode without writing a program.
For working in "Manual Machine" mode, you will need the "Manual
Machine" software option.
The appearance of the displayed softkeys can vary, according to
which coordinate system is set. Machining before the center of
rotation is typical.
Please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications for this.
Main screen After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen
appears.
Basic manual machine screen
Machining options Workpieces can be machined in the following ways using "Manual
Machine":
• Manual mode
• Single-cycle machining

6 6
6.2 Zero offsets
6.2 Zero offsets

As an alternative to the "Set ZPO" function (see Sec. "Setting the
zero-point offset"), you have the option of inputting the values of the
zero-point offset directly into the zero-point offsets list.
Activating the zero offset

section.
ZPO Press the "ZPO selection” softkey

selection
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

In "manual" mode, you can directly carry out simple machining
processes without having to write a program.
The following functions are available to you for machining in manual
mode:
• Axis movements
• Taper turning
• Straight (plan or longitudinal turning)
Tool, spindle speed, and direction of spindle rotation are activated by

"Cycle Start".
A change in feedrate immediately becomes active.

6 6
6.3.1 Traversing axes
For preparatory actions and simple traversing movements, input the

parameters directly into the "Manual" basic screen form.
Tool selection
Select the desired tool in "T".
Input the feedrate and the spindle speed.
Select the direction of spindle rotation.
-or-
Set the direction of rotation via the machine control panel.
The spindle starts immediately after the tool is selected.

Machining
Select the axis to be traversed at the machine control panel.
X …
Press the "-" or "+" key on the machine control panel.

…
+
-or-
Select the direction with the aid of the cross-switching lever.
The axes are moved at the set machining feedrate.
The active direction is graphically displayed in the basic screen by

means of a wind rose.

6 6
T Tool
F Machining feedrate mm/min
mm/rev
S1 Main spindle rev/min
m/min
S2 Tool spindle rev/min
Direction of : Spindle is turning counter-clockwise

rotation
: Spindle is turning clockwise
: Spindle stops
: No change
6.3.2 Taper turning
The basic effective direction can be selected via the axis direction
keys or via the cross-switching lever. In addition, a taper angle (α) can
also be input.
The “taper turning” function is not available if two tool turrets are
installed on the X axis of your machine,
¾ Press the "Taper turning" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.

Taper
Jog turning
¾ Select the tool, spindle, and spindle direction and specify the
machining feedrate.
¾ Input the desired angle α.
Selecting/deselecting the taper turning and changing the angle α is

only possible in the reset state.
T, F, S See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“

α Turning of the coordinate system Degrees

6 6
6.3.3 Straight turning

Use this function for simple, straight machining (e.g. face or
longitudinal turning).
¾ Select the "Strght" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.

Jog
All ¾ Select the desired straight machining via the "All axes" softkeys,
axes -or- "Xα" or "Zα", and input the desired values for the traversing path
Xα or target position and the angle, if necessary.
-or-
Zα
F See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“

All Axes:
C Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc) mm
Z2 Target position of an added axis, if it exists (abs. or inc.) mm
XAlpha
Z Target position in direction X (abs. or inc.) mm
α Angle of the straight line to the X axis Degrees
ZAlpha
X Target position in direction Z (abs. or inc.) mm
α Angle of the straight line to the Z axis Degrees

6 6
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

The following functions are available to you for comprehensive
machining in manual mode:
• Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling,
threads)
• Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping)
• Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)
General machining For more complex machining processes, proceed in the following
sequence order:
1. Select the desired function via the corresponding softkey.

Input the desired values in the parameter screen form.
2. Press the "OK" softkey in order to accept the values.
The input screen form closes.
A line with the specified parameters is displayed on the basic
screen.
3. Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The selected cycle is started.
You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and
correct the inputs.
Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.
Approaching and When machining the workpiece, you traverse from the current position
returning to the machining start point. After the machining process, the tool is
returned along a direct path to the starting point.

6 6
6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine
For drilling on the face or peripheral surface of a workpiece, the

following cycles are available to you under Automatic:
• Drilling centered
• Thread centered
• Centering
• Drilling
• Reaming
• Deep hole drilling
• Tapping
• Thread milling
The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to the

parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Drilling").
Drilling can only be performed at individual positions. To define the

position, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 and
Z0 (peripheral surface machining).
6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine
For turning a workpiece, the following turning cycles are available to

you under Automatic:
• Stock removal
• Recess
• Undercut
• Thread
• Parting
The parameters of the input screen forms (with the exception of
thread-cutting) correspond to the parameters under Automatic (see
Sec. "Turning").
Thread cutting In addition to the functions that are made available by "thread-cutting"
under Automatic, you can insert idle cuts during the machining
process under "Manual Machine."
You can interrupt the infeed of the cutting depth during the machining
process by inserting idle cuts, in order to smooth the flanks for
example.
Idle You can insert idle cuts using the "Idle cut" softkey.
cut This softkey only works during machining.

6 6
Reworking threads You can rework existing threads, when repairing previously cut
threads for example or as the result of changes that arise from re-
measuring (see Sec. "Reworking Threads").
If you want to rework some threads, input the initial plunge depth E
(inc.). This is the depth that was reached during a previous machining.
By inputting the plunge depth, you avoid unnecessary idle cuts when
reworking the threads.
6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine
For milling simple geometric shapes, the following functions are

available to you just as under Automatic:
• Rectangular pocket
• Circular pocket
• Rectangular spigot
• Circular spigot
• Longitudinal slot
• Circumferential slot
• Multiple edge
• Engraving
The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to the

parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Milling").
Machining can only be performed at individual positions. To define the
position, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 and
Z0 (peripheral surface machining).

6 6
6.5 Simulation
6.5 Simulation
For more complex machining processes, you can check the result of
your inputs with the aid of the simulation, without having to traverse
the axes (see Sec. "Simulating Machining"). The execution of the work
steps is graphically displayed on the screen during this.
In "Manual" mode, you can simulate a work step with an already

opened and filled out parameter screen form.
Setting up a blank shape For the graphical display, a pre-defined blank shape is used. You can
modify the blank as you like (such as for a G-code program) (see Sec.
"Changing the blank shape for a G-code program").

7 7
01/2008 G code program
G code program
7.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 7-344
7.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 7-347
7.3 G code editor........................................................................................................... 7-349
7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-352

7 7
G code program 01/2008
7.1 Creating a G code program

If you do not want to program a program with ShopTurn functions, you
can also create a G-code program with G-code commands in the
ShopTurn operator interface.
You can program a G code command according to DIN 66025.

In addition, parameter screen forms provide you with support when
measuring and programming contour, drilling, turning, and milling
cycles. G code is generated from the individual forms, which you can
recompile back to the screen forms. The measuring cycle support
function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
For a detailed description of G code commands to DIN 66025, and of

cycles and measuring cycles, please refer to:
References: /PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals
/PGA/, Programming Manual Advanced
/PGZ/, Programming Manual Cycles
/BNM/, Programming Manual Measuring Cycles
You can call up context-sensitive help, if you require more information

on particular G code commands or cycle parameters on the PCU 50.3.
For a detailed description of the online help, please refer to:

Creating a G code
program
Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.
G code Press the "New" and "G code program" softkeys.

New
program
Enter a program name.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.
You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore
symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters
with uppercase letters.

7 7
¾ Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.

-or-
+ The G code editor is opened.
¾ Enter the desired G code commands.
Calling a tool
Continue ¾ Select the "Continue" and "Tools" softkeys if you want to select a
Tools
> tool from the tool list.
-and-
¾ Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.
-and-

program
The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor.
Text such as the following is displayed at the current cursor position in
the G code editor: T="ROUGHING80"
In contrast to sequence programming, the settings stored in tool

management do not automatically become active when the tool is
called up.
This means that, in addition to the tool, you must also program the tool
change (M6), the direction of spindle rotation (M3/M4), the spindle
speed (S...) and the coolant (M7/M8).
Example:
...
T="ROUGHING80" ;Call tool
M6 ;Change tool
M7 M3 S1=2000 ;Switch on coolant and main spindle
...
Cycle support
Contour Turning
¾ Using the softkey, select whether you would like support for
... programming contours, drilling, milling, or turning cycles.
Create ¾ Select the cycle you want via the softkey.

contour ...
OK
The cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.
¾ Position the cursor on a cycle in the G code editor if you want to

display the associated parameter screen form again.
Re- ¾ Select the "Recompile" softkey.

compile
The parameter screen for the selected cycle appears.

7 7
Edit
Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code
editor from a parameter screen form.
Measuring cycle support

Switch to the extended horizontal softkey bar.
Measure Measure Press the "Measure turning" or "Measure milling".

turning -or- milling
Calibrate Select the required measuring cycle via the softkey.

meas. cal. ...
Enter the parameters.

OK
The measuring cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.
Position the cursor on a measuring cycle in the G code editor, if

you want to display the associated parameter screen form again.
Re- Select the "Recompile" softkey.

compile
The parameter screen for the selected measuring cycle appears.
Edit
editor from a parameter screen form.
Online help (PCU 50.3)

Place the cursor on a G code command in the G code editor or on
an input field in a cycle support parameter screen form.
Press the "Help" key.
The relevant help screen is displayed.

7 7
7.2 Executing a G code program

During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in
accordance with the programming on the machine.
After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining
is performed automatically. You can, however, stop the program at
any time and then resume execution later.
Execution of the program can be simulated graphically on the screen

to enable you to check the programming result without moving the
machine axes.
For more information about simulation, see Section "Simulation".
The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program:

• The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the
machine.
• A program created in G code is available.
• The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered.
• The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine
manufacturer are activated.
When executing a G code program, the same functions are available

as for executing a sequence program (see Section "Machining a
workpiece").
Simulating G code
program
-or- Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-or- The program is opened in the G code editor.
Press the "Simulation" softkey.
Execution of the program will be displayed in full on the screen in

graphical form.
Edit
editor from the simulation screen.

7 7
Executing G code
program
-or- -and-
Position the cursor on the desired G code program.
-and-

Execute
-or-
Press the "Execute" softkey if you are in the "Program" operating

area.
ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads

the G-code program.

Cycle Start
Execution of the G code program starts on the machine.

7 7
7.3 G code editor
7.3 G code editor

You use the G code editor when you want to change the sequence of
program blocks within a G code program, delete program blocks or
copy program blocks from one program to another.
When you want to change G code in a program that you are currently
executing, you can only change the G code blocks that have not yet
been executed. These blocks are highlighted.
The following functions are available in the G code editor:

• Select
You can select any G code.
• Copy/paste
You can copy and paste G code within a program or between
different programs.
• Cut
You can cut and therefore delete any G code. However, the
G code remains in the buffer, so you can still paste it in somewhere
else.
• Search/replace
In a G code program, you can search for a specific character string
and replace it with a different one.
• To start/end
You can jump easily to the start or end of the G code program.
• Numbering
When you insert a new or copied G-code block between two
existing G-code blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new
block number. This block number may be higher than the one in
the following block. Using the "Re-number" function, you can
renumber the G-code blocks in ascending order.
The G code editor will be opened automatically if you write or open a

G code program.
Selecting a G code
Place the cursor at the position in the program where you want
your selection to start.
Position the cursor at the point in the program at which the

highlighting should end.
The G code is selected.

7 7
7.3 G code editor
Copying a G code
Select the G code that you want to copy.
The G code is stored in buffer memory and remains there even if you
switch to another program.
Pasting a G code
Copy the G code that you want to insert.
The copied G code is pasted from buffer memory into the text in front
of the cursor.
Cutting a G code
Select the G code that you want to cut.
Cut Press the "Cut" softkey.
The selected G code is removed and stored in buffer memory.
Finding a G code
A new vertical softkey bar appears.
Enter the character string that you want to locate.
The G code program is searched for the character string in the

forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the
cursor.

search necessary.
The next character string found is displayed.

7 7
7.3 G code editor
Finding and replacing a

G code
A new vertical softkey bar appears.
Search/ Press the "Search/replace" softkey.

replace
Enter the character string that you want to find and the characters
that you want to insert in its place.
The G code program is searched for the character string in the

forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the
cursor.
Replace all Press the "Replace all" softkey if you want to replace the
character string throughout the entire G code program.
-or-
Continue Press the "Continue search" softkey if you want to continue the
search search without replacing the instance of the character string
found.
-or-
Replace Press the "Replace" softkey if you want to replace the character
string at this point in the G code program.
Jumping to start/end
Continue To Select the "Continue" and "To start" or "To end" softkeys.
> start
The beginning or end of the G code program is displayed.
To
end
Renumbering the G code

blocks
Continue Renumber Select the "Continue" and "Renumber" softkeys.
> >
Enter the number of the first block and the increment between
block numbers (e.g. 1, 5, 10).
The blocks are renumbered.

You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 for the increment
or block number.

7 7
7.4 Arithmetic variables
7.4 Arithmetic variables

Arithmetic variables (R variables) are variables that you can use within
a G code program.
G code programs can read and write the variables. You can assign a
value in the R variable list to variables that can be read.
Input and deletion of variables can be disabled via the keyswitch.
Displaying R variables
Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.

-or-
Press the "R vari." softkey.
The R variable list is opened.
Finding R variables
Enter the number of the variable you want to find.
The variable is displayed.
Changing R variables
Place the cursor on the input field of the variable that you want to
change.
Enter the new value.
The new value of the variables is applied immediately.
Deleting R variables
Place the cursor on the input field of the variable whose value you
want to delete.
Press the "Backspace" key.
The value of the variable is deleted.

8 8
01/2008 Working with a B axis
Working with a B axis
8.1 Turning machines with a B axis .............................................................................. 8-354
8.2 Tool alignment for turning ....................................................................................... 8-356
8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-356

8.3.1 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 8-357
8.3.2 Approach/retraction................................................................................................. 8-358
8.4 Position pattern ....................................................................................................... 8-360
8.5 Measuring a tool...................................................................................................... 8-361
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-362

8 8
Working with a B axis 01/2008
8.1 Turning machines with a B axis

You can align milling and turning machines with an additional B axis.
7RROVSLQGOH %D[LV
0DLQVSLQGOH & %
&
; &RXQWHUVSLQGOH
&
<
=
The initial setting in which all tools must be dimensioned is B=0.
In turning operations, you can align the tool for special machining
tasks via the B axis and C axis.
In milling operations, you can tilt the WCS via the B axis and C axis to
allow milling and drilling on inclined surfaces.
The B axis is also used for aligning tools for end face and lateral
surface machining.
Alignment angle β and γ Alignment angles β und γ are required for turning with tool alignment.
Ǫ
Z
β : Rotation around the Y axis (with the B axis)

γ: Rotation around the Z axis (with the tool spindle)

8 8
Turning Alignment angles allow you to perform a wide range of different

turning operations (for example, internal and external longitudinal
machining, surface machining with a main spindle and counterspindle,
residual material) without changing the tool.
˟ r
ǩ r
; ;
˟ r
ǩ r
= =
([WHUQDOORQJLWXGLQDOPDFKLQLQJ ,QWHUQDOORQJLWXGLQDOPDFKLQLQJ
˟ r ˟ r
ǩ r ǩ r
; ;
= =
6XUIDFHPDFKLQLQJPDLQVSLQGOH 6XUIDFHPDFKLQLQJFRXQWHUVSLQGOH
Display of the B axis The B axis is displayed in the following windows:

• Axis position display in actual value window,
• In the “Positioning” window to position axes in manual operation,
• You can operate the “Additional axes” softkey to have the B axis
displayed in the zero offset list and define its offset.

8 8
8.2 Tool alignment for turning
8.2 Tool alignment for turning

The input fields for the β and γ angle for aligning the tool are available
in the tool screenform and in all turning screenforms.
β angle Two arrow settings are available for the main alignment of the tool,
which you can toggle with the “Alternat.” softkey.
: β = 0°
: β = 90°
You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of
your choice.
The counterspindle is programmed in exactly the same way as the

main spindle.
The direction display of the arrows depends on the settings.

γ angle In input field “γ”, you can enter two main directions (0° and 180°) via
the “Alternat.” softkey.
You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of
your choice. However, this value may only differ slightly.
8.3 Milling with a B axis

No special entries are required for face machining and peripheral
surface machining.
Face milling is performed with β = 0° (G17). If you are machining on

the face end of the counterspindle, γ = 0° (G17) corresponds to the
opposite B axis position.
The peripheral surface is milled with β = 90° (G19), even if you are
machining with the counterspindle.
Machining on an inclined You can define inclined surfaces in a swivel mask.

surface
You can enter the rotation of the planes around the geometry axes (X,
Y, Z) of the tool coordinate system just as described in the workpiece
drawing. The rotation of the workpiece coordinate system in the
program is then automatically converted to a rotation for the relevant B
and C axis of the machine during machining.

8 8
The swivel axes are always rotated to place the tool axis
perpendicular to the machining axis for machining. During machining,
the rotary axes are then permanently set.
The coordinate system is adapted to the surface to be machined

irrespective of the required rotary axis positions.
8.3.1 Swiveling
The main programming procedure is:
• Swivel the coordinate system into the plane to be machined via

the swivel mask.
• Machine with the setting “Face B”.
• If another machining type follows, swiveling is automatically
deselected.
The swiveled coordinates are maintained in the Reset status and after
Power On. So you can still move out of an inclined hole, for example,
with retraction in the +Z direction.
Swiveling is executed one axis at a time. In the case of axial swiveling,

the coordinate system is rotated about each axis in turn, with each
rotation starting from the previous rotation. The axis sequence can be
freely selected.
Transfor-
Press the "Various" and "Transformations" softkeys.
mations >
Swivel
>
Initial
Press the "Initial setting" softkey to restore the initial state, i.e. to
setting zero the values again.
This is done, for example, to swivel the coordinate system back to
its original orientation.

8 8
T Tool name
RP Retraction plane for face end B mm
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
X0 Reference point for rotation mm
Y0 Reference point for rotation mm
Z0 Reference point for rotation mm
X Axis angle The sequence of the axes Degrees
Y Axis angle can be replaced as required Degrees
Z Axis angle with "Alternat." Degrees
X1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Y1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Z1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Other additive transformations can be added to the offsets before

(X0, Y0, Z0) or after (X1, Y1, Z1) swiveling (see Section "Work
offsets").
8.3.2 Approach/retraction
If you want to optimize approach/retraction for swiveling with the B

axis, you can create a special cycle that ignores the automatic
approach/retraction strategy.
You can insert the approach/retraction cycle between any sequence

program blocks, but not within chained blocks.
The starting point for the approach/retraction cycle is the safety

clearance approached after the last machining operation.
If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a
total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a
further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point.
The 1st, 3rd, and 6th position moves the linear axes, while the 2nd
and 5th position moves the rotary axes.
If no tool change is needed you can generate no more than 6 motion
blocks.
The numbers (1 – 6) represent the processing sequence.
If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/retraction, you

can call the cycle several times in succession to program further
positions.

8 8
Caution
Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the
approach/retraction cycle directly to the starting point for the next
machining operation.
F1 Feedrate for approach to first position mm/min

X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Y1 Retraction to safety clearance mm
β2 Beta angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees
γ2 Gamma angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees
Followup The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.
Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction
manual
F3 Feedrate for approach to third position mm/min
alternative to rapid traverse
X3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed
and change tool
Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last
position programmed
No: Do not change tool
T Tool name (not with tool change "no")
D Edge number (not with tool change "no")
F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position mm/min
β5 Beta angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees
γ5 Gamma angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees
Followup The position of the workpiece tip is maintained during swiveling.
Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction
manual
F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position mm/min
Y6 Retraction to safety clearance mm

8 8
8.4 Position pattern
8.4 Position pattern

In drilling and milling operations with face end B, position patterns "full
circle/pitch circle" provide the following options for machining on
inclined surfaces
• with swivel plane

• with C axis
Positions
>
Face end B:
on swivel plane
α1 Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete, Degrees
all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only)
N Number of positions on the circle
Positioning Straight line Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
with C axis
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to C axis. Degrees
α1 Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete, Degrees
all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only)
N Number of positions on circle

8 8
8.5 Measuring a tool

To determine the tool dimensions, the alignment (i.e. the β angle)
must be specified.
For turning tools, an input field for the γ angle also appears.
β angle In order to measure milling and turning tools, you can make the two
main settings β = 0° and β = 90° and set a value input field by
toggling.
γ angle In order to measure turning tools, you can set the γ angle 0° and 180°
by toggling.
Positioning rotary axes You can position rotary axes with NC Start.
Before the length is set the rotary axis positions are checked. If they
deviate too much from the prescribed values, the message “Tool
alignment beta inconsistent, press NC Start” (or gamma) is displayed.

8 8
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode

For preparatory tasks in manual mode, tool selection and spindle
control is always performed centrally in the T, S, M window (see also
Section "Selecting the tool and spindle").
Alignment angle Turning tools:
To align the turning tools, you can toggle between settings β = 0° and
β = 90° for the β angle and between settings 0° and 180° for the
γ angle. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any
value.
Milling tools:
To align the milling tools you can toggle between settings β = 0° and
β = 90°. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any
value.

9 9
01/2008 Working with two tool holders
Working with two tool holders
9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders.......................................................................... 9-364
9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-364
9.3 Measuring a tool...................................................................................................... 9-365

9 9
Working with two tool holders 01/2008
9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders
9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders

ShopTurn allows you to work on a turning machine with two tool
holders, both of which are installed on an X axis. The tool holders
might be turrets, multifix, or a combination of both.
The main machining is performed in the negative X axis direction. As

both tool holders are installed on the same axis it is only ever possible
to machine with one tool.
The workpiece is always located between the two tool holders. The
tool lengths of all tools, i.e. of both tool holders, have the same
reference point, which is usually on tool holder 1. That is why the tool
lengths of the tools of the second tool holder are always longer than
those of the tools on the first tool holder.
9.2 Programming with two tool holders
You always program in the basic coordinate system (WCS of the first
tool holder). You do not have to specify in which tool holder the tool is
inserted.
If a tool on the second tool holder is selected, the X and Y axes are
mirrored and the main spindle and counter spindle are offset (rotated)
by 180°.
Tool holder 1
X Workpiece coordinate
system for use with the
1st tool holder
L1
L2
Z
Workpiece coordinate
system for use with the
2nd tool holder
X
Tool holder 2
In the simulation the tool is always displayed on the correct side, as it

will be used on the machine.

9 9
01/2008 Working with two tool holders
The programmed C offset around 180° only affects C axes, not

spindles.
It is not possible to machine a thread with tools that are distributed

between both tool holders.
G code programming The following points must be taken into account in G code
programming.
• After a tool change, mirroring of the tools on the second tool
holder is automatically activated.
• When a TRANSMIT command is programmed, mirroring of the
tools on the second tool holder is automatically activated.

Toggle settings "Position 1" and "Position 2" are available for
scratching for tool measurement. Here you can set in which tool
holder the tool to be measured is located.

9 9
Working with two tool holders 01/2008
Notes

10 10
01/2008 Tool management
Tool management
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine ............................................................. 10-368
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................. 10-374

10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-374
10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool........................................................ 10-376
10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................. 10-377
10.3 Sorting tools .......................................................................................................... 10-378
10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list.............................................................................. 10-378
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ............................................... 10-379
10.6 Relocating a tool ................................................................................................... 10-381
10.7 Positioning a magazine......................................................................................... 10-383
10.8 Entering tool wear data ......................................................................................... 10-383
10.9 Activating tool monitoring...................................................................................... 10-384
10.10 Managing magazine locations .............................................................................. 10-386

10 10
Tool management 01/2008
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

Various tools are used for machining workpieces. The geometry and
technology data of these tools must be known to ShopTurn before you
can execute a program (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine").
ShopTurn provides the tool list, tool wear list, and magazine list
screen forms for managing your tools. With these, you can also
manage tools that are not located in the revolver (magazine).
The various lists can possibly have been changed by the machine
manufacturer, in comparison to the following description.
Tool list You must enter all the tools that you want to use on the turning
machine in the tools list. The tools that are in the tool turret must be
assigned to specific magazine locations. In addition, you have the
capability of sorting or deleting tools at this point.
Tool list
Loc. Location number in the magazine
The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the

machining position, has a gray background.
If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the
magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine
(e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are
displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when
sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)
For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-
gripper can also be displayed.

10 10
Spindle location
Locations for grippers 1 and 2
Type Tool type and cutting edge position

Using the "Alternat." key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge
position.
Tool name The tool is identified by its name. The tool name can be specified as
text or numbers.
DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool)

(DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool,
DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)
Tool offset data

You can find a detailed description of the tool offset data in Sec.
"Setting-up the Machine" (Section "Tools").
(D No.) edge The tool offset data shown here is valid for the currently selected
cutting edge of a tool.
Length X Tool length compensation in the X direction
Length Z Tool length compensation in the Z direction
Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool

For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the radius or the
diameter. For turning tools, you always specify the cutting edge
radius. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter
specification.
Reference direction for the holder angle
The holder angle of a cutting tool

The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
The plate angle of a cutting tool

The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
Pitch Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev, inch/rev, turns/", or MODULE
Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill
Plat.width Plate width of a pin

The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.

10 10
Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin

The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the
program execution simulation.
N Number of teeth for a milling cutter

The number of teeth for a milling machine
From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if
the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.
Angle of the tool tip for a drill

When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as
far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into
consideration.
Tool-specific
specifications
Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation
The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for
powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or
counter-spindle for turning tools.
If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial
threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting
direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the
tool.
CW spindle rotation
CCW spindle rotation
Spindle not switched on
Coolant supply 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) ON/OFF

during use of this tool
Coolant ON
Coolant OFF
Observe that some machines do not have a coolant supply.


10 10
Multifix If you use a multifix tool holder, the tool list looks like the following:
Tool list for a multifix tool holder
If you use multifix tool holders, the tool change takes place manually,
i.e. the tools are swapped in and out by hand.
Tool selection for multifix
tool holders
Tool In the tool list, select the desired tool and activate it (the values of the
selection tool) with the aid of the “Tool selection” softkey.

10 10
Tool wear list You must enter the wear data for your tools in the tool wear list.
ShopTurn takes this data into account on machining the workpiece.
You can also activate tool monitoring here as well as disable tools or
identify them as oversized.
Tool wear list
Loc., Type, Tool name, Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position,
DP text/number designation of the tool and duplo number
(D No.) edge The displayed wear data is relative to the selected cutting edge of the
tool.
∆ Length X Wear in the X direction
∆ Length Z Wear in the Z direction
∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ Wear of the radius or diameter
TC Tool monitoring through service life (T),

quantity (C) or
wear (W)
Prewarning limit Pre-warning limit of service life, quantity, or wear
Service life Service life of the tool

Quantity Quantity of the finished workpieces
Wear Maximum allowable tool wear
Tool condition Tool is disabled for machining (G) or over-sized (U).

(last two columns)

10 10
Tool magazine In the magazine list, you can disable or enable individual magazine
locations.
Magazine list
Loc., Type, Tool name, Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position,
DP text/number designation of the tool and duplo number
Location disable Disabling of the magazine location
Tool condition Display of the specified tool condition in the tool wear list

10 10
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

You can input tools and their accompanying offset data directly into
the tool list or you can simply read-in existing tool data from outside of
tool management (see Sec. "Securing/reading-in tool/zero-point
data").
10.2.1 Creating a new tool
When you want to create a new tool, ShopTurn offers a range of

generally available tool types. The tool type determines what
geometry data you have to enter and how it is calculated.
Possible tool types
The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.
Create tool Install the new tool in the tool turret.
Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool
occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the
tool list.
New > Press the "New tool" softkey.

tool
Roughing Select the desired tool type and the cutting edge position using
3D_Probe
tool ... the softkeys.
Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge
positions are made available to you.

10 10
The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.
Enter a unique tool name.

You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain
a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the
underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").
If you assign a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool"
window appears. You can decide whether you would like to create a
sister tool (see Sec. "Creating a sister tool").
Enter the offset data of the tool.
If you later want to change the cutting edge position of the tool,
position the cursor in the "Type" column and select one of the preset
-or-
options using the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key.
Changing a tool name You have the option of later changing a tool’s name.
Position the cursor in the "Tool name" column and enter the
desired name.
If you enter a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool"
window appears. You are asked whether a duplo tool should be
created.
Do not Press the "Do not rename" softkey if you do not want to create a
rename sister tool.
Enter a new tool name.
Abort
Using the "Abort" softkey, you can cancel the process at any time.

10 10
10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool
In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of
offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can set up a total of
9 edges for each tool.
There must be no gaps between the edges, i.e. if 3 edges are

required for a tool, these must be edges 1 to 3.
Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one
edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.
Cutting New ¾ Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" softkeys.
edges > edge
Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data
input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.
¾ Select another cutting edge position if appropriate.
¾ Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.
¾ Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset
data.
Delete ¾ Select the "Delete edge" softkey if you want to delete the tool
edge edge offset data for an edge.
You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge
number.
D No. + D No. -
By selecting softkey "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the offset
data for the edge with the next highest or next lowest edge number
respectively.

10 10
10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool
A replacement is a tool that you can use for the same machining being
performed by an already input tool. You can use it, for example, to
replace a broken tool.
For each tool in the tool list, you can create several replacement tools.
The duplo number 1 is always assigned to the original tool and duplo
numbers 2, 3, etc. are assigned to the replacement tools.
For sister tools, the following data must agree with that of the original
tool:
• Tool type
• Tool nose position
• Tool radius
• Direction of rotation
• Coolant
New > Create the sister tool as a new tool.

tool (see Sec. "Creating a new tool")
Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.
The “Create duplo tool” window is displayed.
The sister tool automatically receives the next available duplo number.
Input the tool offset data of the tool.

10 10
10.3 Sorting tools
10.3 Sorting tools

When you are working with large magazines or several magazines, it
is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then
you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.
Select the "Tool list" or “Tool wear” softkey in the "Tools WOs"
operating section.
-or-
Sort Press the "Sort" softkey.

>
To To name Activate one of the softkeys to choose the sort criterion.

magazine -or-
The tools are listed in the new order.
To type
-or-
To
-or- T-number
10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list

Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a
clearer overview.
Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete.
Delete tool Press the "Delete tool" softkey.
Press the "Delete" softkey.

Delete
The tool data of the selected tool is deleted and the magazine location
is enabled again.

10 10
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

You can unload tools in the magazine that you are not using at
present. ShopTurn then automatically saves the tool data in the tool
list outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later,
simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding
magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to
be entered more than once.
Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations

must be enabled in a machine data code.
When loading, ShopTurn automatically opens an empty space where

you can load a tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
Also when loading, you can directly specify an empty magazine

location or define in which magazine ShopTurn should search for an
empty location.
If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the
location number you require when loading the tool, not the magazine
number.
If a spindle location is displayed in the tool list, you can also change a
tool directly into or out of the spindle. You can lock the loading and
unloading via machine data.
Loading a tool into the

magazine
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the
magazine (if the tools are sorted according to magazine location
number you will find it at the end of the tool list).
Load Press the "Load" softkey.
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is

initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.
Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested
location.
-or-

10 10
Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.
-or-
Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the
Spindle
spindle.
The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location.
Finding an empty
location in the magazine
and loading the tool
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the
magazine.
Load Press the "Load" softkey.

Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if
you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.
-or-
Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.
An empty location is suggested.
The tool is loaded into the suggested magazine location.
Unloading an individual
tool from the magazine
Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.
Unload Press the "Unload" softkey.
The tool is unloaded from the magazine.

10 10
10.6 Relocating a tool
Unloading all tools from

the magazine
Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Unload Unload Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" softkeys.

all
All tools are unloaded from the magazine.
Abort
You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the
"Abort" softkey. The current tool is unloaded and then the process is
aborted.
The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different
magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from
the magazine in order to load them into a different location.
ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location to which you can

relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define the
magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.
If your machine has just one magazine, you only need to enter the
location number you require, not the magazine number.
If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also attach or
detach a tool directly to or from the spindle.

10 10
Specifying an empty
location
Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.
Relocate
Press the "Relocate" softkey.

Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the suggested

location.
-or-
Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.
-or-
Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the
Spindle
spindle.
The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.
Finding an empty
location
Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.
Relocate
Press the "Relocate" softkey.

Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if
you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.
-or-
Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.
An empty location is suggested.
The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

10 10
10.7 Positioning a magazine
10.7 Positioning a magazine

You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.
Positioning a magazine
location
Position the cursor on the magazine location that you would like to
position on the loading point.
Press the "Position" softkey.

Position
The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.
10.8 Entering tool wear data

Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can
measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopTurn then
takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or
radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in
workpiece machining.
When you input the wear values, ShopTurn checks whether or not the
values exceed an incremental or absolute upper limit. The incremental
upper limit indicates the maximum difference between the previous
and new wear value. The absolute upper limit indicates the maximum
total value that you can enter.
The upper limits are set in a machine data code.
Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.
Enter the differences for length (∆ Length X, ∆ Length Z) and

radius/diameter (∆ Radius/∆ ∅) in the appropriate columns.
The wear data entered is added to the radius but subtracted from the
tool length. A positive differential value for the radius therefore
corresponds to an oversize (e.g. for subsequent grinding).

10 10
10.9 Activating tool monitoring

ShopTurn allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically
to ensure constant machining quality.
You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use or identify
them as oversize.
Tool monitoring can be activated via a machine data code.

Tool life (T) With the tool life T (Time), the service life for a tool with machining
feedrate is monitored in minutes. When the remaining tool life is = 0,
the tool is set to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the
next tool change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its
place.
Tool life is monitored on the basis of the selected tool cutting edge.
Count (C) With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is
counted. The tool is also disabled in this case, when the remainder
reaches "0".
Wear (W) With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters ∆ Length X,
∆ Length Z, or ∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here, too,
the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value for
wear W.
The wear monitoring function must be set up by the machine

manufacturer.

Pre-warning limit The pre-warning limit specifies a tool life, workpiece count or wear at
which the first warning is displayed.
The value for output of a warning due to the wear stage reached is
calculated from the difference between the maximum wear and the
warning limit entered.
Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to
use them for workpiece machining.
Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations (left and
right adjacent location) are only reserved alternately, i.e. you can only
insert the next tool in the next magazine location but one. (This can
also contain an oversize tool.)

10 10
Monitoring tool use
Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.
In the column "T/C" select the parameter that you wish to monitor
(T = Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).
Enter a pre-warning limit for the tool life, count, or wear.
Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled number
of workpieces to be machined or the maximum permissible wear.
The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.
If you wish to monitor the count, you must also insert the following G
code commands before the end of the program in every program that
calls the tools to be monitored:
SETPIECE(1) ; increase count by 1
SETPIECE(0) ; delete T no.
Entering tool statuses

Place the cursor on a tool.
Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want
to disable the tool for machining.
-or-
Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you
want to mark the tool as oversize.
The tool disable or location disable for neighboring magazine

locations is now active.

10 10
10.10 Managing magazine locations
10.10 Managing magazine locations

If a magazine location is defective, or when an oversize tool requires
more than half a neighboring location, you can disable the magazine
location.
It is no longer possible to assign any tool data to a disabled magazine

location.
In the "Tool condition" columns, you can also read whether a tool is
disabled (G) or over-sized (U).
You can change the tool conditions in the tool wear list (see Sec.
"Activating tool monitoring").
Disable magazine
location
Place the cursor on the relevant empty magazine location in the

"Location disable" column.
Press the "Alternat." softkey.
The letter "G" appears as a symbol for the disabling of the location.
Enable magazine
location
Place the cursor on an empty magazine location in the "Location

disable" column.
Press the "Alternat." softkey.
The letter "G" is no longer visible and the magazine location is now
free again.

11 11
01/2008 Program management
Program management
11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn...................................................................... 11-388
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)........................ 11-389
11.2.1 Opening a program ............................................................................................... 11-391
11.2.2 Executing a program............................................................................................. 11-392
11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive ......................................... 11-393
11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program......................................................................... 11-394
11.2.5 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-395
11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program ................................................................ 11-396
11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-397
11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data .................................................................. 11-398
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)........................................... 11-401

11.3.1 Opening a program ............................................................................................... 11-403
11.3.2 Executing a program............................................................................................. 11-404
11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program ............................................................................... 11-405
11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive ........ 11-406
11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program......................................................................... 11-408
11.3.6 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-409
11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program.................................................... 11-410
11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-412
11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data .................................................................. 11-412

11 11
Program management 01/2008
11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn
11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn

All the programs for workpiece machining that you have created in
ShopTurn are stored in the NCK-working memory.
You can access these programs at any time via the Program Manager
for execution, editing, copying, or renaming. Programs that you no
longer require can be deleted to release their storage space.
For exchanging programs and data with other workstations, ShopTurn

provides you with various options:
• Own hard disk (PCU 50.3 only)

• CompactFlash card
• Disk drive (PCU 50.3 only)
• USB network connection
The following sections explain the program management of ShopTurn

on either the NCU (HMI Embedded sl) or the PCU 50.3 (HMI
Advanced).
Please find out which version of ShopTurn you are running and then
read the section titled either "Managing programs with ShopTurn on
NCU (HMI Embedded sl)" or "Managing programs with PCU 50.3".

11 11
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

For the version of ShopTurn on the NCU (HMI Embedded sl), all the
programs and data are always kept in the NCK work memory.
In addition, the directory management of a USB/network drive can be
displayed.
ShopTurn user interface on NCU

(HMI Embedded)
edit edit
ShopTurn programs ShopTurn programs

ShopTurn subroutines ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs G code programs
USB/
Network drive NC main memory
Data storage with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)
You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the

Program Manager.
Program manager for ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)
In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that
contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In
addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work
memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can allow you to display
the directories and programs of USB/network drives and the CF-card

11 11
drive. The "USB Front" softkey is preset to the default.

In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:
Directory

Program
Zero point/tool data
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the
following information:
• Name
The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to
external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point/tool data: INI
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)
You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and

executing a program in:
References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl.
In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are

created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.
Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for
memory space management in the NCK.
Opening the directory
¾ Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.

¾ Select the storage medium using the softkey.

...
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

11 11

Returning to the next

highest directory level
Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.
-or-
Place the cursor on the Return line.
-and-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

-or- The next highest directory level is displayed.
11.2.1 Opening a program
To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the
machining plan for the program.
Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The

11 11
11.2.2 Executing a program
You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time
to machine workpieces automatically.
If you want to execute a program that was created on another

machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the
positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around,
you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was
programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that
you change the preceding symbol of the position data.
Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute
ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the
program.
Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a
workpiece").
If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press

the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode.
Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start"
key.

11 11
11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive
If the capacity of your NCK work memory is already close to being

exhausted, you also have the option of executing G code programs
from the network drive.
In this way, instead of the entire G code program being loaded into the
NCK memory, only the first part of it is loaded. Subsequent program
blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.
The G code program remains stored on the network drive while the
drive is being used for executing it.
Sequence programs cannot be executed from the network drive.
¾ Open the Program Manager.
¾ Select the network drive using the softkey.

…
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code
program you want to execute.

-or- The directory opens.
¾ Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.
Continue Exec. from ¾ Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.
> hard disk
G code program.

Cycle Start
workpiece"). The program contents are continuously reloaded into the
NCK work memory as the machining progresses.

11 11
11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program
Directory structures help you to manage your program and data

transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this
purpose in a directory.
You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-
directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").
The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work
memory.
Creating a directory
Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

New Directory
Enter a new directory name.
The new directory is created.
Creating a program
Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a

new program.

-or-
Press the "New" softkey.
New
ShopTurn Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a
program sequential control program.
(see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")
-or-
G code Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a G
program code program.
(see Sec. "G code program")

11 11
11.2.5 Selecting several programs
You can select several programs individually or in a block for

subsequent copying, deleting, etc.
Selecting several
programs as a block
Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.
Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or

-or- down key.
The entire block of programs is marked.
Selecting several
programs individually
Press the "Select" key.
Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.
-or-
Press the "Select" key again.
The individually selected programs are marked.

11 11
11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program
To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing

program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program
and only changing selected programs or program blocks.
You can also copy and paste directories and programs to and from
other locations in order to exchange data with other ShopTurn
systems via the network drive.
You can also rename directories or programs.
It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.
Copying a
directory/program
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.
Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied
directory/program.
The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory

level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the
directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert
it under a different name.
Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the

directory/program.
-or-
Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory

under another name.
-and-

11 11
Renaming a
directory/program
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to

rename.

Rename
In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name.

The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not
permitted to have the same name.
The directory/program is renamed.
11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program
From time to time, delete the programs or directories that you are no
longer using in order to keep your data manageable and to free up the
NCK work memory again.
Save the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier
(e.g. USB flash drive) or via a USB/network drive.
Please note that USB FlashDrives are not suitable for use as
persistent memory media.
Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data
and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are
deleted.
If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents
of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs
that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.
Press the "Delete" and "OK" softkeys.

Delete
The selected directory or program is deleted.

11 11
11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data
Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point
settings.
You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero
point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this
program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the
relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting
station can be copied easily into the tool management system using
this option. For further details, see:
References: /FBTsl/, CNC Commissioning: ShopTurn,
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl
You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data
• Magazine loading
• Zero points
• Basic zero point
You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up:

• Complete tool list or all zero points
• All tool data or zero points used in the program
The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system

provides for loading/unloading of tool data into/out of the magazine
(see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into
the magazine").
Saving data
Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data
you wish to back up.
Continue Back up Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.

> data
Select the data you want to back up.
Change the suggested name if you want to.

The name of the originally selected program with extension
"..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point
file.

11 11
The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which
the selected program is stored.
If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will
now be overwritten with the new data.
If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a
directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF
program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.
Importing data
Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish
to re-import.
Execute Select the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key.

-or- The window "Read in backup data" is opened.
Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero
point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.
The data are read in.

Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as
follows:
All tool offset data

First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data
are imported.
All tool offset data used in the program

If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management system, you can choose between the following options.
Replace all Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing
tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.
-or-
Replace Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data
none import.
-or-

11 11
Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool.
If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated
there.
-or-
Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.
With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old

tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with
loading/unloading.
If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will
be added as an extra tool to the tool list.
Zero offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are
imported.
Magazine loading
If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are
entered in the tool list without a location number.

11 11
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

For the version of ShopTurn with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced), there is
also an individual hard disk in addition to the NCK work memory. This
makes it possible to store all the programs that are not currently
needed in the NCK on the hard-disk.
In addition, the directory management of a disk drive, USB drive, or
network drive can be displayed.
ShopTurn user interface PCU 50.3
edit edit edit
ShopTurn programs ShopTurn programs ShopTurn programs

ShopTurn subroutines ShopTurn subroutines ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs edit G code programs
load G code programs
unload
Network drive Data manage-
ment on hard save
Diskette drive disk NC main memory
Data storage with PCU 50.3
You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the

Program Manager.
Program manager PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that
contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In
addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work
memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can be used. You can

11 11
display the directories and programs of the following storage media:

• USB/Network drives (network card required)
• Diskette drive
• Local USB front interface
• The hard disk as archive directory.
In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:
Directory
Program
Zero point/tool data
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the
following information:
• Name
The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to
external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point/tool data: INI
• Loaded
At a cross in the "Loaded" column, you will see whether the
program is still in the NCK work memory (X) or whether it is on the
hard-disk ( ).
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)
You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and

executing a program in:
In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are

created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.
Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for
memory space management on the hard-disk and in the NCK.

11 11
Opening the directory
¾ Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.

¾ Select the storage medium using the softkey.
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

Returning to the next

highest directory level
¾ Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.
-or-
¾ Place the cursor on the Return line.
-and-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

-or- The next highest directory level is displayed.
11.3.1 Opening a program
To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the
machining plan for the program.
¾ Press the "Program" softkey.
¾ Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The

11 11
11.3.2 Executing a program
You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time
to machine workpieces automatically.
If you want to execute a program that was created on another

machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the
positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around,
you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was
programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that
you change the preceding symbol of the position data.
Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute
program.
Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
workpiece").
If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press

the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode.
Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start"
key.

11 11
11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program
If you do not want to execute one or more programs in the immediate

future, you can unload them from the NCK work memory.
The programs are then stored on the hard-disk and the NCK work
memory is freed up.
As soon as you execute a program that was stored on the hard-disk,

it is automatically reloaded into the NCK work memory.
However, you can load one or more sequential control programs into
the NCK work memory without have to immediately execute them.
Programs that are in "Machine Auto" mode cannot be unloaded from

the NCK work memory to the hard-disk.
Unloading a program
Position the cursor on the program that you would like to unload
from the NCK work memory.
Continue Manual Press the "Continue" and "Manual unload" softkeys.

> unload
The selected program is no longer marked with an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.
In the line that displays the available memory space, you will see that
the NCK work memory was freed up.
Loading a program
Position the cursor on the program that you would like to load into
the NCK work memory.
Continue Manual Press the "Continue" and "Manual load" softkeys.

> load
The selected program is now marked with an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.

11 11
11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive
If the capacity of your NCK main memory is already stretched, you

can also execute G code programs from the hard disk or a floppy disk
or network drive.
The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before
it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks
are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.
The G code program remains stored on the hard disk or floppy

disk/network drive when executed from there.
You cannot execute sequence programs from hard disk or floppy

disk/network drive.
Running a G code
program from the hard
disk
¾ Open the Program Manager.
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code

program that you want to execute from hard disk.

¾ Place the cursor on the G code program that you want to execute
from hard disk (without "X").
Continue Exec. from ¾ Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.
> hard disk
G code program.

Cycle Start

11 11
Running a G code program

from floppy disk or network
drive
Select the floppy disk/network drive via the appropriate softkey.

...
Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code
program you want to execute.

-or- The directory opens.
Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.
Continue Exec. from Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.
> hard disk
G code program.

Cycle Start

11 11
11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program
Directory structures help you to manage your program and data

transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this
purpose in a directory.
You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-
directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").
The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work
memory.
Creating a directory
Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

New Directory
Enter a new directory name.
The new directory is created.
Creating a program
Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a

new program.

-or-
New
Press the "New" softkey.
ShopTurn Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a
program sequential control program.
(see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")
-or-
G code Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a
program G code program.
(see Sec. "Programming G code")

11 11
11.3.6 Selecting several programs
You can select several programs individually or in a block for

subsequent copying, deleting, etc.
Selecting several
programs as a block
Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or

-or- down key.
The entire block of programs is marked.
Selecting several
programs individually
Press the "Select" key.
Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.
-or-
Press the "Select" key again.
The individually selected programs are marked.

11 11
11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program
To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing

program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program
and only changing selected programs or program blocks.
You can also move directories or programs or rename them.
You can also use the copy, cut and insert capabilities for directories
and programs to exchange data with other ShopTurn systems via
diskette or the network drive.
It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.
Copying a
directory/program
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.
Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied
directory/program.
The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory

level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the
directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert
it under a different name.

directory/program.
-or-

under another name.
-and-

11 11
Renaming a
directory/program
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to

rename.

Rename
In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name.

The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not
permitted to have the same name.
The directory/program is renamed.
Moving a
directory/program
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to move.
Press the "Cut" softkey and then the "OK" softkey.

Cut
The selected directory/program is deleted at this point and stored in
buffer memory.
Select the directory level in which you want to insert the

directory/program.
The directory/program is moved to the selected directory level.

If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this directory
level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a
different name.

directory/program.
-or-

under another name.
-and-

11 11
11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program
Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longer
using to maintain a clearer overview of your data management. Save
the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier (e.g.
USB FlashDrive) or on a USB/network drive.
Please note that USB FlashDrives are not suitable for use as
persistent memory media.
Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data
and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are
deleted.
If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents
of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs
that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.
Press the "Cut" and "OK" softkeys.

Cut
The selected directory or program is deleted.
11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data
In addition to the programs, you can also save/read-in tool data and
zero-point settings.
You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero
point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this
program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the
relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting
station can be copied easily into the tool management system using
this option. For further details, see:
References: /FBTsl/, CNC Commissioning: ShopTurn,
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl
You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data
• Magazine loading
• Zero points
• Basic zero point

11 11
You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up:

• Complete tool list or all zero points
• All tool data or zero points used in the program
The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system

provides for loading/unloading of tool data into or out of the magazine
(see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into
the magazine").
Saving data
Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data
you wish to back up.
Continue Back up Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.

> data
Select the data you want to back up.
Change the suggested name if you want to.

The name of the originally selected program with extension
"..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point
file.
The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which
the selected program is stored.
If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will
now be overwritten with the new data.
If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a
directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF
program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.
Importing data
Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish
to re-import.
Execute Press the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key or "Cursor right".
-or- The window "Read in backup data" is opened.
-or-
Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero
point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.

11 11
The data are read in.

Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as
follows:
All tool offset data

First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data
are imported.
All tool offset data used in the program

If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management system, you can choose between the following options.
Replace all Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing
tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.
-or-
Replace Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data
none import.
-or-
Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool.
If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated
there.
-or-
Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.
With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old

tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with
loading/unloading.
If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will
be added as an extra tool to the tool list.
Zero offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are
imported.
Magazine loading
If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are
entered in the tool list without a location number.

12 12
01/2008 Messages, alarms, user data
Messages, alarms, user data
12.1 Messages.............................................................................................................. 12-416
12.2 Alarms ................................................................................................................... 12-416
12.3 User data............................................................................................................... 12-417
12.4 Version display...................................................................................................... 12-419

12 12
Messages, alarms, user data 01/2008
12.1 Messages
12.1 Messages
ShopTurn displays messages in the dialogue line, which give you
operating information or inform you of the progress of the machining
process. The appearing messages do not interrupt the machining.
Dialogue line with a message
12.2 Alarms
If errors are detected in ShopTurn, the system generates an alarm
and aborts program execution if necessary. You can display the
alarms complete with alarm code, date, error text and cancel criterion.
The error text gives you more detailed information on the cause of the
error.
Warning
If you do not heed an alarm that is issued and do not clear the cause
of the alarm, it can present a hazard to the machine, the workpiece,
the saved settings and, in certain circumstances, your health.
The various alarm numbers are assigned to the following sections:
61000-62999 Cycles
100000-100999 Basic system
101000-101999 Diagnostics
102000-102999 Services
103000-103999 Machine
104000-104999 Parameters
105000-105999 Programming
106000-106999 Reserved
107000-107999 OEM
110000-111999 Reserved
112000-112999 ShopTurn
120000-120999 Reserved
A description of all the alarms can be found in

References: /DAsl/, Diagnostics Manual,
SINUMERIK 840Dsl/840Di sl

12 12
12.3 User data
Press the "Alarm list” softkey.
The list containing the active messages and alarms appears.
Carefully check the machine according to the description given in

the alarm.
Clear the cause of the alarm.
Press the key that appears as a symbol next to the alarm if you
want to delete the alarm.
Reset Cycle Start
-or-
Switch the machine or controller off and then on again if the

symbol of the main switch (POWER ON) is displayed next to the
alarm.
12.3 User data

User data are variables that are used internally by both ShopTurn and
G-code programs. These user data can be displayed in a list.
The following types of variables are defined:

• Global User Data (GUD)
Global user data is valid in all programs.
The display of global user data (GUD) can be disabled via
keyswitch or password.
• Local User Data (LUD)

Local User Data is only valid in the program or subroutine in which
it was defined.
During program execution, ShopTurn displays the LUDs that are
present between the current block and the end of the program. If
you press the "Cycle Stop" key, the LUD list is updated. The
values, however, are continuously updated.
• Global Program User Data (PUD)

Global program user data is created from the local variables (LUD)
defined in the main program.
PUD is valid in all subroutines, where it can also be read and
written.
The local data is also displayed with the global program user data.

12 12
12.3 User data
• Channel-specific user data

Channel-specific user data is only applicable in one channel.
ShopTurn does not display user data of the AXIS and FRAME type.
To learn which variables ShopTurn displays, please see the machine

manufacturer’s specifications.
Displaying user data
Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.

-or-
Press the "Expansion" key.
Press the "User data" softkey.
Global Program Activate one of the softkeys to choose the user data that you want
user data ... user data to display.
GUD + GUD - You can press the "GUD +" and "GUD -" softkeys to display the
or global and channel-specific user data from GUD 1 to GUD 9.
Searching user data
Enter the text string that you want to locate.

You can search for any character string.
The user data is displayed.

search necessary.
The next user data that contains the search string is displayed.

12 12
12.4 Version display

You can find the ShopTurn version in the start-up screen.
The ShopTurn and NCU version can also be seen on the CNC-ISO
operator interface.
Displaying versions
Press the "Expansion” key in order to open the expanded basic

menu bar.
Service Press the "Diagnosis" and "Service displays" softkeys.

Diagnosis
displays
NCU Press the "Version" and "NCU version" softkeys.

Version
version
The NCU version is displayed at the top of the window that appears:
xx.yy.zz.nn.

12 12
Notes

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Examples
13.1 Standard machinings ............................................................................................ 13-422
13.2 Contour milling ...................................................................................................... 13-434

13 13
Examples 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings

Workpiece drawing
FS3
R6
4x∅5 23 FS2 5
X
4°
M48x2
23
∅ 34
∅60
R8
R23
FS1 FS1 3x45°
10
35
∅32 70
∅90 80
85
95
X 5:1
8
4
15° 15°
R1 R1
Workpiece drawing
Blank Dimensions: ∅90 x 120 mm

Material: Aluminum
Tools Roughing tool_80 80°, R0.6

Roughing tool_55 55°, R0.4
Finishing tool 35°, R0.4
Recessing tool Plate width 4
Threading tool_2
Drill ∅5
Milling tool ∅8

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Program
1. Create a new program ¾ In the required directory of the "Program manager" operating
ShopTurn
New
area, press the and program softkeys.
¾ Program name (here: Enter demo part_1)
¾ Press the softkey.
2. Program header The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.

¾ Define the blank:
Blank Cylinder
XA 90 abs
ZA 0 abs
ZI -120 abs
ZB -100 abs
Retraction Simple
XRA 2 inc
ZRA 5 inc
Tool change point MCS
XT 160 abs
ZT 409 abs
SC 1 inc
S1 4000 RPM
Unit of measurem. mm
3. Stock removal cycle for

Stock
facing ¾ Press the removal softkeys.
¾ Enter parameters:
T Roughing tool_80
F 0.300 mm/rev
V 300 m/min
Machining
Position
Direction Plan (parallel to the X axis)
X0 60 abs
Z0 2 abs
X1 -1.6 abs
Z1 0 abs
D 2 inc
UX 0 inc
UZ 0.1 inc

13 13
Examples 01/2008
Press the softkey.
4. Input of blank contour with New

contour computer Press the contour softkeys.
Input contour name (here: Input Cont_1)
Press the softkey.
Determine the starting point of the contour:
X 60 abs
Z 0 abs
Press the softkey.
Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by
pressing the softkey:
1. Z -40 abs
2. X 80 abs Z -45 abs
3. Z -65 abs
4. X 90 abs Z -70 abs
5. Z -95 abs
6. X 0 abs
7. Z 0 abs
8. X 60 abs Z 0 abs
Press the softkey.

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Blank contour
5. Input of finished part New

contour with contour Press the contour softkeys.
computer
Input contour name (here: Input Cont_2)
Press the softkey.
X 0 abs
Z 0 abs
1. X 48 abs FS 3
2. α2 90°
3. Direction of rotation
R 23 abs X 60 abs K -35 abs.
Dialog Accept
I 80 abs selection dialog FS 2
4. Z -80 abs R 6
5. X 90 abs Z -85 abs FS 3
6. Z -95 abs

13 13
Examples 01/2008
Press the softkey.
Finished-part contour
6. Stock removal (roughing) Stock

Press the removal softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Roughing tool_80
F 0.300 mm/rev
V 200 m/min
Machining
Direction of stock Longitudinal (parallel to the Z axis)

removal
Machining side External
Machining direction ← (from front to back)
D 1.9 inc
Cutting depth
UX 0.2 inc
UZ 0.1 inc
BL Contour
Set machining area No
limits
Relief cuts No
Press the softkey.

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Stock removal
7. Solid machine residual St. remov.

material Press the resid. softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Roughing tool_55
F 0.200 mm/rev
V 250 m/min
Machining

removal
D 2 inc
Cutting depth
UX 0.200 inc
UZ 0.100 inc
limits
Relief cuts Yes
FR 0.250 mm/rev
Press the softkey.
8. Stock removal (finishing) Stock

Press the removal softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Finishing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev
V 300 m/min

13 13
Examples 01/2008
Machining

removal
Stock allowance No
limits
Relief cuts Yes
Press the softkey.
9. Groove (roughing)
Recess
Press the softkeys
Enter parameters:
T Recessing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev
V 300 m/min
Machining
Groove position
Reference point
X0 60 abs
Z0 -70
B2 8 inc
T1 4 inc
α1 15 degrees
α2 15 degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
D 2 inc
U 0.100 inc
N 1
Press the softkey.

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Recess
10.Groove (finishing)
Recess
Press the softkeys
Enter parameters:
T Recessing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev
V 300 m/min
Machining
Groove position
Reference point
X0 60 abs
Z0 -70
B1 5.856 inc.
T1 4 inc
α1 15 degrees
α2 15 degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
N 1
Press the softkey.
11.Longitudinal threads
Thread Thread
M48x2 (roughing) Press the long. softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Threading tool_2

13 13
Examples 01/2008
P 2 mm/rev
G 0
S 400 RPM
Cut segmentation Diminishing
Machining method
Thread External thread

X0 48 abs
Z0 0 abs
Z1 -25 abs
W 4 inc
R 4 inc
K 1.226 inc.
α 30 degrees
Infeed
AS 10
U 0.020 inc
V 1 inc
Q 0 degrees
Press the softkey.
12.Longitudinal threads
Thread Thread
M48x2 (finishing) Press the long. softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Threading tool_2
P 2 mm/rev
G 0
S 400 RPM
Machining method
Thread External thread
X0 48 abs
Z0 0 abs
Z1 -25 abs
W 4 inc
R 4 inc
K 1.226 inc.
α 30 degrees
Infeed
V 1 inc
Q 0 degrees
Press the softkey.

13 13
01/2008 Examples
13.Drilling
Drilling
Drilling
Press the reaming > softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Drill
F 200 mm/min
S 1000 RPM
Position Face
Point/Shaft Tip
Z1 10 inc
DT 0s
Press the softkey.
14.Positioning
Positions
Press the > softkeys.
Enter parameters:
Position Face
Right-angle/Polar Polar
Z0 0 abs
C0 0 abs
L0 16 abs
C1 90 abs
L1 16 abs
C2 180 abs
L2 16 abs
C3 270 abs
L3 16 abs
Press the softkey.
15.Mill a rectangular pocket Pocket Rectangu-

Press the > lar pocket softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Milling tool
F 0.030 mm/tooth
S 1800 RPM
Position Face
Machining method
Position Single position

X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 23

13 13
Examples 01/2008
L 23
R 8
α0 4 degrees
Z1 5 inc
DXY 50%
DZ 3
UXY 0.1 mm
UZ 0.1
Insertion Center
FZ 50 mm/min
Press the softkey.
Result
Process plan

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Simulation, volume model

13 13
Examples 01/2008
13.2 Contour milling

Workpiece drawing
Ø120
R10
4
R1
R46
0
T=3
R5
R6
R 10
40
80
T=5
Workpiece drawing
Blank Dimensions: ∅120 x 80 mm

Material: Aluminum
Tools Milling tool: ∅18

Milling tool: ∅5
Program
1. Create a new program In the required directory of the "Program manager" operating area,
ShopTurn
New
press the and program softkeys.
Program name (here: input contour)
Press the softkey.
2. Fill out the program head The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.
Define the blank:
Blank Cylinder
XA 120 abs
ZA 0 abs
ZI -80 abs

13 13
01/2008 Examples
ZB -50 abs
Retraction Simple
XRA 125 abs
ZRA 2 abs
Tool change point WCS
XT 200 abs
ZT 200 abs
SC 1 inc
S1 1000 RPM
Unit of measurem. mm
3. Input the limiting contour

Contour New
¾ Press the milling contour softkeys.
¾ Input contour name (here: Contour_1)
¾ Determine the starting point of the contour:
Position Face
X 0 abs
Y -61 abs
¾ Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by
1. Direction of rotation
R 61 abs Y -61 abs I 0 abs.

Dialog Accept
selection dialog

13 13
Examples 01/2008
Limiting contour
Press the softkey.
4. Input exterior contour

Contour New
Press the milling contour softkeys.
Input contour name (here: Contour_2)
Press the softkey.

Position Face
X 0 abs
Y 50 abs
Press the softkey.
1. Direct. of rot.
R 50 abs X 0 abs Y -50 abs
Tangent to
2. prec. elem. Direct. of rot.

13 13
01/2008 Examples
R 10 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 10 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 10 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 10 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 10 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Outside contour

13 13
Examples 01/2008
Press the softkey.
5. Ream outside contour

Contour Remove
Press the milling softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Milling tool_18
F 0.200 mm/tooth
V 200 m/min
Position Face
Machining
Z0 0 abs
Z1 5 inc
DXY 50%
DZ 2
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Starting point Auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.100 mm/tooth
Retraction mode To retraction plane
Press the softkey.
6. Input inside contour

Contour New
Press the milling contour softkeys.
Input contour name (here: Contour_3)
Press the softkey.
Machining plane Face

X 0 abs
Y 46 abs
Press the softkey.
1. Direct. of rot.
R 46 abs X 0 abs Y -46 abs

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Tangent to
R 6 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 14 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 6 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 14 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog
Tangent to
R 6 abs X 0 abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog

13 13
Examples 01/2008
Inside contour
Press the softkey.
7. Ream inside contour

Contour Remove
Press the milling softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Milling tool_5
F 0.200 mm/tooth
V 250 m/min
Position Face
Machining
Z0 0 abs
Z1 3 inc
DXY 100%
DZ 2
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Starting point Auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.100 mm/tooth
Retraction mode To retraction plane
Press the softkey.

13 13
01/2008 Examples
Result
Process plan

13 13
Examples 01/2008
Notes

A A
01/2008 Appendix
Appendix
A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-444
B Index ........................................................................................................................ I-447

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 A-443
A A
Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations
A Abbreviations
ABS Absolute dimensions
CNC Computerized Numerical Control
COM Communication:
Component of NC control that performs and coordinates
communication.
D Cutting edge
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard)
DRF Differential Resolver Function:

The function in conjunction with an electronic handwheel generates an
incremental work offset in automatic mode.
DRY Dry Run: Dry run feedrate
F Feedrate
GUD Global User Data
INC Increment
INC Incremental dimensions
INI Initializing Data
LEDs Light-Emitting Diode
M01 M function: Programmed stop
MCS Machine Coordinate System
MD Machine data
MDA Manual Data Input
MPF Main Program File
NC Numerical Control:
The NC control comprises the components NCK, PLC, PCU and
COM.

A-444 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
A A
01/2008 Appendix
A Abbreviations
NCK Numerical Control Kernel:

A component of the NC control that processes the programs and
essentially coordinates the movement processes for the tool machine.
OP Operator Panel
PC Personal Computer
PCU Personal Computer Unit:

Component of NC control allowing communication between operator
and machine.
PLC Programmable Logic Control:

Component of NC control for processing machine tool control logic
PRT Program test
REF Approaching a reference point
REPOS Reposition
ROV Rapid override
S Spindle speed
SBL Single Block
SI Safety Integrated
SKP SKiP: Skip block
SPF Sub Program File
SW Software
T Tool
TMZ Tool Magazine Zero
V Cutting rate
WCS Workpiece coordinate system
WO Work offset
WPD Workpiece Directory

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 A-445
A A
Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations
Notes

A-446 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
I I
01/2008 Appendix
Index
B Index
3 C
3D probe, 2-59 C1, 0-7
3-window view, 3-117 C3, 0-7
A Calculation variants, 3-96
Abort program, 3-92 Cancelling machining, 3-92
ABS, 4-128 Centering, 5-167, 5-289
Absolute dimensions, 4-128 Change parameter, 1-41
Accepting parameters, 1-41 Changing dialog selection, 5-217, 5-283
Access authorization, 1-28 Changing program settings, 5-322
Activate, 7-351 Channel operational messages, 1-30
Additional command, 5-210, 5-212, 5-276 Channel status, 1-30
Adjustment, 4-133 Chipbreaking, 5-164, 5-166, 5-169, 5-171
Alarms, 12-416 Circle
Alignment angle, 8-354, 8-356 Known center point, 5-156
Angular offset, 5-203 Known radius, 5-157
Annular slot, 5-250 Polar, 5-162
Append contour element, 5-216, 5-282 Circular pocket, 5-236
Approach, 4-126 Circular spigot, 5-244
Approach cycle, 5-326 Circumferential slot, 5-250
Approach mode, 5-285 Clamping a spindle
Approach strategy, 5-285 Contour milling, 5-270
Arithmetic variables, 7-352 Drilling, 5-163
Automatic mode, 2-50 Milling, 5-231
Auxiliary function, 3-106 Close contour, 5-214, 5-278
Axes CNC ISO user interface, 1-42
Positioning, 2-81 Collet dimensions, 2-52
Repositioning, 3-95 Complete, 5-316
Traversing, 2-79 Complete machining, 4-143
Axis key, 1-26 Concatenation, 4-122
B Contour, 0-7
B axis, 8-354 Changing, 5-216, 5-282
Approach/retraction, 8-358 Copying, 4-146
Measuring a tool, 8-361 Creating, 5-210, 5-273
Milling, 8-356 Exact machining, 5-212
Position pattern, 8-360 Renaming, 4-147
Swiveling, 8-357 Representation, 5-208, 5-271
Tool selection in manual mode, 8-362 Rounding, 5-220
Basic block display, 3-94 Start point, 5-210
Blank, 4-136 Contour beginning, 5-210, 5-273
Blank shape Contour calculator, 5-206, 5-268
Changing, 3-112 Contour element
Block search, 3-96 Creating, 5-211, 5-275
Box, 5-182 Contour end
Broken-line graphics, 1-37 Transition element, 5-212
Button, 2-59 Contour milling, 5-268

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 I-447
I I
Appendix 01/2008
Index
Contour pocket Deleting, 11-397, 11-412

Centering, 5-289 Moving, 11-411
Chamfering, 5-302 Opening, 11-390, 11-403
Finishing, 5-298 Renaming, 11-397, 11-411
Milling, 5-293 Selecting, 11-390
Predrilling, 5-289 Disable magazine location, 10-386
Residual material, 5-296 DP, 2-60
Roughing, 5-293 Drawer, 5-204
Contour spigot, 5-270 DRF offset, 3-102
Chamfering, 5-311 Drill, 2-58
Finishing, 5-308 Drilling, 5-167
Milling, 5-303 Centered, 5-164
Residual material, 5-306 Deep, 5-169
Roughing, 5-303 Manual Machine, 6-340
Contour transition element, 5-211, 5-276 DRY run feedrate, 3-110
Contour Duplo number, 10-377
Island, 5-268 E
Pocket, 5-268 EMERGENCY OFF, 1-25
Coolant, 2-63 Enable magazine location, 10-386
Coordinate system, 1-21 End, 7-351
Coordinate transformation, 2-71 End face, 4-125
Defining, 5-324 End of contour, 5-210, 5-273
Count, 10-384 End of program, 4-123, 4-136, 4-148
Counterspindle, 4-142 Engraving, 5-261
Counterspindle Entering parameters, 1-40
Angular offset, 5-319 Equidistant, 2-55
Machining, 5-316 External thread, 5-173
Park position, 5-319 F
Settings, 2-52 F, 4-142
Cut segmentation, 5-220 Face, 4-125
Cutting depth, 5-219 Face milling, 5-303
Cutting edge, 4-141 Face view, 3-115
Cutting edge position Face Y, 4-125
Changing, 2-60 Feed interruption, 5-220
Cutting rate, 4-142 Feedrate, 4-142
Cycle, 0-7 Feedrate override, 1-27
Cycle approach, 4-126 Feedrate status, 1-30
Cycle support, 7-344 Finding an empty location, 10-380, 10-382
D Finishing, 4-143
D, 4-141 Finishing tool, 2-57
Deep hole drilling, 5-169 Front, 5-316
Delete contour element, 5-218, 5-284 Front C, 4-125
Deleting machining lines, 3-118 Front edge, 2-52
Dialog line, 1-29 Full circle, 5-184
Directory Function group, 4-140
Copying, 11-396, 11-410
Creating, 11-394, 11-408

I-448 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
I I
01/2008 Appendix
Index
G M
G code M function, 2-84, 3-106
Copying, 7-350 M01, 3-101
Cutting, 7-350 Machine control panels, 1-25
Finding, 7-350 Machine coordinate system, 2-51
Into sequence program, 5-328 Machine run times, 2-87
Pasting, 7-350 Machine zero, 1-21
Selecting, 7-349 Machining, 4-143
Skipping, 3-102 Simulating, 3-107
G code block, 5-329 Simultaneous recording, 3-107
Renumber, 7-351 Machining direction, 5-322
G code editor, 7-349 Machining feedrate, 4-142
G code program Machining lines, 3-108
Executing, 7-347, 11-393, 11-406 Machining method, 4-143
G function, 3-106 Machining plane, 4-124
Gearing step, 2-78 Magazine
Grinding allowance, 5-215, 5-216 Positioning, 10-383
Gripping, 5-316 Magazine list, 10-373
Grooving, 5-224 Magnifying glass, 2-69, 3-118
Residual material, 5-226 Main program, 5-313
H Main spindle, 4-142
H function, 3-106 Settings, 2-52
Hard disk, 11-406 Manual Data Input, 2-86
Help screen, 1-39 Manual Machine
I Drilling, 6-340
Idle cuts Milling, 6-341
Manual Machine, 6-340 Simulation, 6-342
INC, 4-129 Traversing movements, 6-336
Inch, 2-50 Turning, 6-340
Inclined axis, 4-124 Zero offsets, 6-335
Increment, 2-80 Manual mode, 2-49, 2-77
Incremental dimension, 4-129 M function, 2-84
Incremental dimensions, 4-129 Positioning axes, 2-81
Input field, 1-40 Spindle, 2-78
Insert a contour element, 5-217, 5-283 Stock removal, 2-81
Insert mode, 1-41 Tool, 2-77
Inside contour, 5-276 Traversing axes, 2-79
Internal thread, 5-173 Unit of measurement, 2-85
K Work offset, 2-84
Key-operated switch, 1-28 Marker, 5-315
Keys Matrix, 5-179
Operation, 1-32 MCS, 2-51
L MDA, 2-49, 2-86
Line, 5-178 Measuring
Longitudinal slot, 5-247 Tool, 2-63, 2-65
Lowercase letters, 5-263 Workpiece zero, 2-70
Measuring cycle support, 7-344

I I
Appendix 01/2008
Index
Messages, 12-416 Position

Millimeters, 2-50 Freely programmable, 5-176
Milling Repeating, 5-189
Manual Machine, 6-341 Position pattern
Milling tool, 2-58 Box, 5-182
Mirror writing, 5-262 Full circle, 5-184
Mirroring, 5-325 Line, 5-178
Modifying contour element, 5-217, 5-282 Matrix, 5-179
Multifix tool holder Pitch circle, 5-186
Manual Machine, 10-371 Positioning block, 4-123
Multiple edge, 5-259 POWER ON, 12-417
N Predrilling, 5-289
Network drive, 11-393, 11-406 Pre-warning limit, 10-384
New contour Probe
Milling, 5-273 Calibrating, 2-67
Turning, 5-210 Process plan, 1-37
New tool, 2-56, 10-374 Processing time, 3-108
Number of workpieces, 4-148 Program, 0-6
O Copying, 11-396, 11-410
Offset, 5-324 Correcting, 3-105
Online help, 7-344 Creating, 4-136, 11-394, 11-408
Operation, 1-32 Deleting, 11-397, 11-412
Operator panel OP 010, 1-22 Executing, 11-392, 11-404
Origin, 3-118 from another machine, 11-392, 11-404
Outside contour, 5-276 Load, 11-405
P Moving, 11-411
Parameter Opening, 11-391, 11-403
Calculating, 1-41 Overstoring, 3-103
Parameterization screen form, 1-38 Renaming, 11-397, 11-411
Parameters Running in, 3-93
Deleting, 1-41 Select, 3-90
Parting, 5-204 Selecting several, 11-395, 11-409
Password, 0-4, 1-28 Starting, 3-92
Path milling, 5-284 Testing, 3-104
Peripheral, 4-125 Unload, 11-405
Peripheral surface, 4-125 Program block, 4-122
Peripheral surface C, 4-125 Chained, 4-122
Peripheral Y, 4-126 Changing, 4-144
Pitch circle, 5-186 Copying, 4-146
Plunge cutting, 5-254 Creating, 4-140
Plunge-turning, 5-227 Cutting, 4-146
Residual material, 5-229 Displaying, 3-94
Plunging, 5-254 Number, 4-147
Pocket Pasting, 4-146
Circular, 5-236 Repeating, 5-315
Rectangular, 5-232 Searching for, 4-147
Pole, 4-130, 5-159 Selecting, 4-146

I I
01/2008 Appendix
Index
Program control, 1-30 Retraction cycle, 5-326

Test run feed rate, 3-119 Reworking threads
Program editor, 4-145 Manual Machine, 6-341
Program header, 4-122, 4-136 Rotary drill, 2-56, 2-59, 10-374
Program management Rotation, 5-324
PCU 50.3, 11-401 Rotation C, 5-325
ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded, 11-389 Roughing, 4-143
Program manager, 11-389, 11-401 Roughing tool, 2-57
Program structure, 4-122 S
Programmed stop, 3-101 S, 4-142
Programming S1, 0-7, 1-29
with two tool holders, 9-364 S2, 0-7, 1-29
Programming graphics, 1-37 S3, 0-7, 1-29
Protection levels, 1-28 Safety distance, 4-139
Pulling, 5-316 Safety Integrated, 2-48
Q Saving tool data, 11-398, 11-412
Quantity, 4-148 Saving zero point data, 11-398, 11-412
R Scale, 2-76
R variables, 7-352 Scaling, 5-325
Radius compensation, 4-141 Screw tap, 2-59
Rapid traverse override, 1-27 Search
Reading in tool data, 11-398, 11-412 Block, 3-98
Reading in zero point data, 11-398, 11-412 Text, 3-100
Reaming, 5-167 Secondary mode, 1-30
Rear, 5-316 Selecting a dialog, 5-212, 5-277
Recess, 5-193 Selecting parameters, 1-40
Recessing tool, 2-58 Selecting the unit, 1-41
Recompile, 7-345, 7-346 Sequence program, 4-134
Rectangular pocket, 5-232 Set machining area limits, 5-220
Rectangular spigot, 5-240 Settings
Reference point, 2-46 Automatic mode, 3-119
Remote Diagnostics, 1-42 Changing, 5-322
Repeating, 5-315 Manual mode, 2-84
Replacement tool, 10-377 ShopTurn Open, 1-44
Repos, 3-95 Side view, 3-114
Repositioning, 3-95 Simulation, 3-109, 7-347
Reset, 1-25 Manual Machine, 6-342
Residual material Simultaneous recording
Contour pocket, 5-296 During machining, 3-111
Contour spigot, 5-306 Prior to machining, 3-110
Grooving, 5-226 Single Block, 3-93
Plunge-turning, 5-229 Skip, 3-102
Stock removal, 5-222 Slot
Retract, 4-126 Circumferential, 5-250
Retract mode, 5-285 Longitudinal, 5-247
Retract strategy, 5-285 Slot side compensation, 5-286
Retraction, 4-137, 5-322

I I
Appendix 01/2008
Index
Softkey TEMP, 11-397, 11-412

Abort, 1-35 Thread
Accept, 1-35 Centered, 5-166
Back, 1-35 Cutting, 5-199
CNC ISO, 1-42 Milling, 5-173
OK, 1-35 Multiple, 5-202
Overview, 4-134 Re-machining, 5-203
Softkeys Thread undercut, 5-197
Operation, 1-32 Threading tool, 2-58
Special axis, 0-7 Tolerance class, 4-133
Special characters, 5-263 Tolerance quality, 4-133
Speed limits, 4-139 Tool, 4-141
Spigot Changing a name, 10-375
Circular, 5-244 Creating, 2-56, 10-374
Rectangular, 5-240 Delete, 10-378
Spindle override, 1-27 Loading, 10-379
Spindle speed, 4-142 Measuring, 2-63, 2-65
Spindle status, 1-30 Multiple cutting edges, 10-376
Stock removal, 5-164, 5-166, 5-169, 5-171, 5-190, Relocating, 10-381
5-218 Sorting, 10-378
Manual mode, 2-81 Unloading, 10-380
Residual material, 5-222 Tool alignment, 8-356
Stop, 2-59 Tool change point, 4-138
Stop edge, 2-52 Tool holder
Straight Two, 9-364
Manual Machine, 6-338 Tool length compensation, 2-54
Polar, 5-160 Tool life, 10-384
Straight line, 5-154 Tool list, 2-60, 10-368
Switching off, 2-46 Tool magazine, 10-373
Switching on, 2-46 Tool monitoring, 10-384
Synchronization point, 5-203 Tool name, 2-57
T Tool nose radius compensation, 2-55
T, 4-141 Tool offset data, 2-54, 10-369
Tailstock, 4-138 Tool radius compensation, 2-55
Tangent, 5-212, 5-277 Tool spindle, 4-142
Taper Tool type, 2-60
Manual Machine, 6-337 Tool wear data, 10-383
Tapping, 5-171 Tool wear list, 10-372
Teach tool change point, 4-140 Tool-specific specifications, 10-370
Teaching, 5-330 Total offset, 2-71
Contour object, 5-332 Trochoidal milling, 5-253
Cycle, 5-330 Turning, 4-125
Position pattern, 5-331 Manual Machine, 6-340
Teaching a contour object, 5-332 Turning machines
Teaching a cycle, 5-330 with B axis, 8-354
Teaching a position pattern, 5-331 Turning out a collet, 2-81
Technology block, 4-123

I I
01/2008 Appendix
Index
Turning tool Wear, 10-384

with two tool holders, 9-364 Work offset list, 2-75
U Workpiece coordinate system, 2-51
Undercut Workpiece counter
Form E, 5-196 G code programs, 3-120
Form F, 5-196 Workpiece zero, 1-21
Thread, 5-197 Measuring, 2-70
Unit of measurement, 2-50, 4-136 Workpieces, Number of, 4-148
USB drive, 11-393, 11-406 Z
User agreement, 2-48 Z3, 0-7
User data, 12-417 Zero offset, 2-71
User interface, 1-29 Basic, 2-71
V Coordinate transformation, 2-71
V, 4-142 Defining, 2-74
Variables, 12-417 Setting, 2-72
Version display, 12-419 Total, 2-71
Volume model, 3-116 Zero offsets
Vortex milling, 5-253 Calling, 5-323
W Manual Machine, 6-335
WCS, 2-51 Zoom, 3-118

I I
Appendix 01/2008
Index
Notes

To Suggestions
SIEMENS AG
Corrections
A&D MC MS1 For Publication/Manual:
Postfach 3180 SINUMERIK 840D sl

ShopTurn
91050 ERLANGEN, GERMANY
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050 – 222 [Hotline] User Documentation
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98 – 63315 [Documentation]
mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com
From Operation/Programming
Name Order No.: 6FC5398-5AP10-2BA0

01/2008 Edition
Address of your Company/Dept.
Address: Should you come across any printing errors when
reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet.
Zip code City: Suggestions for improvements are also welcome.
Phone: /
Fax: /
Suggestions and/or corrections

Overview
'RFXPHQW2YHUYLHZ6,180(5,.'VO'LVO
*HQHUDO'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6

'VO 6
'LVO
%URFKXUH &DWDORJ1& &DWDORJ

'&RQYHUWHUFKDVVLVXQLWV
8VHU'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
' ' ' 'LVO
'LVO 'LVO 'LVO
'L 'L 'L
2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO 2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO

ದ+0,VO8QLYHUVDO ದ+0,$GYDQFHG ದ)XQGDPHQWDOV ದ&\FOHV
7XUQLQJ0LOOLQJ ದ2SHUDWLRQFRPSDFW ದ-RESODQQLQJ ದ0HDVXULQJ&\FOHV
ದ+0,(PEHGGHG ದ3URJUDPPLQJFRPSDFW
ದ6KRS0LOO ದ6\VWHP9DULDEOH/LVWV
ದ6KRS7XUQ ದ,627XUQLQJ0LOOLQJ
0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFH'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'LVO 'VO
'LVO 'LVO
0DQXDO 0DQXDO &RPPLVVLRQLQJ ದ&RPPLVVLRQLQJ 3DUDPHWHU0DQXDO

ದ1&8 2SHUDWRU&RPSRQHQWV 0DQXDO&1& 0DQXDO ದ3DUW
ದ0DFKLQH DQG1HWZRUNLQJ ದ1&.3/&'ULYH ದ$', ದ3DUW
FRQILJXUDWLRQ ದ+0,VO
ದ+0,(PEHGGHG
ದ+0,$GYDQFHG
ದ6KRS0LOO6KRS7XUQ
0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFH'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 6 'VO
' '
'LVO 'LVO
'L 'L
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO (0&'LUHFWLYHV

ದ%DVLF)XQFWLRQV ದ7RRO0DQDJHPHQW 'ULYH)XQFWLRQV 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
ದ([WHQGHG)XQFWLRQV ದ,62'LDOHFWV
ದ6SHFLDO)XQFWLRQV ದ6LQX&20
ದ6\QFKURQRXV$FWLRQV
(OHFWURQLF'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,.
6,1$0,&6
0RWRUV
'2&21&'
'2&21:(% 5HFRPPHQGHGPLQLPXPVFRSHRIGRFXPHQWDWLRQ

Sinumerik 840D SL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sinumerik 840D SL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction 1

Setting up the machine 2

SINUMERIK 840D sl Creating a ShopTurn 4

ShopTurn ShopTurn functions 5

Working with manual 6

Working with a B axis 8

Working with two tool 9

Valid for Tool management 10

Status code in the "Remarks" column:

A .... New documentation.

Edition Order No. Comment

Technical data subject to change.

SINUMERIK® The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:

An overview of publications, which is updated on a monthly basis and

The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at:

Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked

Target group This documentation is geared toward the operator of single-slide

Other functions not described in this documentation might be

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

National telephone numbers for technical support are provided under

SINUMERIK Internet http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

In the event of a number of levels of danger prevailing simultaneously,

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

Correct usage Please note the following:

Explanation of the parameters

Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or

References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

Other designations may have been assigned by the machine

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20

1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29

Setting up the machine 2-45

2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46

2.3 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero.................................................................................. 2-70

2.7 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2.8.2 Traversing axes.........................................................................................................2-79

2.9 MDA ..........................................................................................................................2-86

2.10 Run times ..................................................................................................................2-87

Machining the workpiece 3-89

3.2 Running in a program................................................................................................3-93

3.3 Displaying the current program block .......................................................................3-94

3.4 Repositioning axes....................................................................................................3-95

3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point ..........................................................3-96

3.6 Controlling the program sequence..........................................................................3-101

3.8 Testing a program ...................................................................................................3-104

3.9 Correcting a program ..............................................................................................3-105

3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions .......................................................................3-106

3.11 Simulating machining ..............................................................................................3-107

3.12 Settings for automatic mode ...................................................................................3-119

Creating a ShopTurn program 4-121

4.3 Sequence program..................................................................................................4-134

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-140

ShopTurn functions 5-149